Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (187 trang)

Unit 7 Re

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.24 MB, 187 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span>Ngµy so¹n: 14/8/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 16/8/2010 Period 1:. REVISION. I. Objectives: Sau tiÕt häc sinh cã kh¶ n¨ng: - Nhí l¹i cÊu tróc ng÷ ph¸p líp 6. - Nhớ lại thì hiên tại đơn, thì hiên tại tiếp diễn. - Đại từ để hỏi. - RÌn luyÖn kÜ n¨ng giao tiÕp. II- Contents. 1. Grammar: - Present simple tense. - Structure: S + V(s/es) + O. - S + do/does + V(inf) + O. - Do/Does + S + V(inf) + O? - Yes, S + do/does. - No, S + do/ does + not. - S + is are am + V(ing) + O. - S + is/ are/ am + not + V(ing) + O. - Is/ are/ am + S + V(ing) + O? - yes, S + is/ are /am. - No, S + is/ are /am + not. 2. Vocabulary. - Question words. Where, what , when, how much, how many……. - Adjectives. - Occupations. III- Teaching aids. - A book, objects of teaching, cards, posters, pictures. IV- Teaching process. Stages Content - Have the S to play : Warm up Net work: Revision Find out adject as much as possible. 8 minutes Feed back. Lucky numbers. Tall; Fat; Heavy; Weak; Long; Short Thin; Cold ; Hot; full; hungry Presentation. . a) Progressive tense 15 minutes Use: To express the actions which are happening at present. Adverb: At this time, at present, at the moment, now, right now… Ex: He is riding his bike. She is walking to the market Form: S + is/ are/am + V(ing) + O S + is/ are/am + not + V(ing) + O is/ are/am + S + V(ing) + O ? yes, S + is/ are /am No, S + is /are/am + not. Ask ss to give out more example b) Present simple tense: Use:. Activities Group. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span> Practice: 15 minutes. Production. 4 minutes. Homework. 3 minutes. To express the actions what happen everyday or regularly Form: S + v(s/es) + O S + do/does + not + v(inf) + O Do/ Does + S + v(inf) + O? yes, S + do/does No, S + do/does + not. Do not = don’t Does not = doen’t Ask ss to make up the exampLE Ask ss to do the exercise: Put the verb into the correct tense: a. He …..(play) volleyball now. b. They/….(walk) to school everyday. c. She …….(travel) to work plane d. He …….(play) soccer at this time. e. We……..(watch) television after school. - Ask the S to do ex : - Give extra board and pieces of papers. - Have the S play game: Matching. - Feedback - Ask the S to do follow a S ‘s commands. - Have the S fill in the blanks with a/ an/ some/ any - Feedback: a/an + one thing. - Some + N(s/es) - It is used in affermative sentences. - Any + count and uncount noun. - It is used in nagative sentence. - Have the S repeat how to ask and answer about number. - Feedback: Have the S look at the book and answer the questions. - Devide the class into 4 groups. - Give them papers. - Have them write a tree of their family. -Call on some S to introduce their family through the tree os family. - Remark and feedback. Ask the S to do exercises again. - Ask the s to do ex in workbooks.. Individual. Teacher – whole class. Teacher -whole class. VAdjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Ngµy so¹n: 15/8/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 17/8/2010. Unit 1:. Period 2:. BACK TO SCHOOL Lesson one: A. Friends ( A1, A2). I.Objective: - Häc sinh «n l¹i vµ më réng c¸ch chµo hái mäi ngêi cµ tù giíi thiÖu vÒ b¶n th©n. - Nắm vững thì hiện tại đơn, dạng thức so sánh thông qua bài đọc hiểu. Häc sinh luyÖn tËp kÜ n¨ng nãi theo cÆp, hái th¨m søc kháe cña nhau. II. Language content:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span> Grammar or structure: S + be + different from.............. S1 + be + adj(er) + than + S2 Vocabulary: (To) miss (v) Unhappy (adj) Different (adj) A lot of Lots of Many Pronunciation: III. The teaching aids: chalk & board, textbook,cassette and tape,pictures, exercise book . Procedures Stages Content Good morning, class - Make questions Warm up What did you do during last summer vacation? 5’ What do you say to your friends when you first meet after the summer holiday? Are you happy to be back again? - Introduce ss newwords Nice to see you again. Nice to meet you. Activity 1 - Ask ss to look at the pictures in part 1a, 1b - First, open the tape. Ask ss to listen and repeat - Require ss to practice in pairs before class Activitie one - Require ss to make up similar dialogue Listen. Then - Require ss to translate the diologue into Vietnamese - Call some pairs of students to ask and answer practice in questions pairs. - Correct mistakes if have 10’ a, Her name is Hoa b, She is in class 7A c, Nam is also in class 7A * Introduse ss how to use “to/so” - They are used in the affirmative agreement sentence Forms: S + be, too So + be + S Look at the picture on the page 11 How many schools are there? There are two. Activity 2 Which school is bigger? Hong ha is. 10’ 1. Hong Ha is Hoa’s new school and the smaller is her old one. Now you read the passage and answer the Pre-re questions. - Ask ss to read in silent. - Ask ss to work in pair and anwer the question. - Ask some pairs to do before the class. While-reading Introduce ss newwords 10’ Still To be different from Require ss to read the passage and answer questions Correct mistakes if have. Activities Teacher whole class. Pair. Group. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span> a, She is from Hue b, She is staying with her uncle and aunt Pair c, No, she doesn’t d, Her new school is bigger than her old school e, Because she misses her parents and her friends Call some ss to read aloud before class Correct the mistakes. Teacher – * Repeat present soimple tense, comparerision with whole class short adj,the way to use “many, much, a lot of, lots of” - Ask ss to write a passage to introduce about his/ her Individual Post-reading 5’ friend Consolidation Repeat the content of the lesson 2’ ss to learn by heart new words and structures Homework -- Ask Ask ss to do your homework 3’ - Ask ss to prepare new lesson VAdjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 17/8/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 21/8/2010. Unit 1: BACK TO SCHOOL Period: 3. Lesson 2: A. Friends (A3, A4, A5, A6) I. Objective: - Häc sinh häc vµ «n l¹i c©u chµo hái thêng gÆp hµng ngµy trong giao tiÕp. - Lµm quen víi mÉu c©u vµ c¸ch dïng TiÕng Anh giao tiÕp. II. Language content: Grammar or structure: How is every thing? Pretty good. Vocabulary: Pronunciation: III .The teaching aids: - Chalk & board, textbook, cassette and tape, pictures, exercise book, IV. Procedures Activites Stages Content - How are you today? Teacher Warm up - I’m fine, thanks. And you? whole class. 5’ - Ask ss to go top the board to read the dialogue Pair then answer the question. - Ask other to correct. Individual - Ask ss to look at the pictures in part A3 What are they doing? Activity 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span> They are greeting each other. Introdoce the character in the picture Mr Tan nad Nga. - First, open the tape. - Tell ss the differrence of using among 10’ Good afternoon/mornihng/everyning. - For more friendly we use Hi and Hello. - Ask ss to listen and repeat - Require ss to practice in pairs - Require ss to practice in pairs before classe. - Expain the purpose of this dialogue. - Ask ss to look at the phrase words to the right of the box and explain. They are used to ask about health or ask someone after a long time they don’t meet each other. Activity 2 - To the right of the box is answer sentences - Ask ss to look at part 4a, 4b. 10’ - Ask ss to listen to the tape and fill in the blanks - Open the tape twice or three times if necessary - Call some pairs of students to do exercises Call some pairs of students to practice completed dialogues 1.Pre- listening - Ask ss to look at pictures in part 5 Who are they in the pictures? What are they doing? - You will hear 4 conversations describing the pictures but they are not in order. You listen to the Activity 3 and mark the number in good order as conversation 10’ in the tape 2.While- listening - Open the tape twice or three times - Open the tape and pause each sentences. Then give correct answers: c) b) d) a) 3.Post- listening - Ask ss to practice in pairs the dialogues PLAY WITH WORDS Activity 4 - Ask ss to look at part 6 5’ Ask ss to listen to the tape and read in chorus Consolidation - Repeat ss comunicated English 2’. Homework 3’ VAdjustment:. - Learn by heart new words. - Learn by heart new structure. - Do the exercise. - Do the exercise. - Prepare new lesson.. Teacher whole class Pair Individual Pair. Teacher whole class. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span> ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 20/8/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 23/8/2010. Unit 1: BACK TO SCHOOL Period: 4. Lesson 3 B. NAMES AND CLASSES (B1, B2,). I. Objectives: - Học sinh biết cách hỏi đáp về thông tin cá nhân nh tên tuổi, địa chỉ và bạn bè nơi m×nh ®ang sèng qua c¸c cÊu tróc. - Ôn laị các câu có từ để hỏi. - Tiếp tục luyện tập hội thoại theo cặp theo các tình huống cho sẵn đồng thừi luyện kĩ n¨ng hoµn thµnh ®o¹n héi tho¹i vµ phiÕu th«ng tin c¸ nh©n. II. Language content: Grammar or structure: What is you8rm family’s name? How old are you? Where do you live? Wh- question. Vocabulary: Pronunciation: III .The teaching aids: - Chalk & board, textbook, cassette and tape, pictures, exercise book IV. Procedures Stages Content Activities - How are you today? Pair Warm up - I’m fine, thanks. And you? 5’ Call 2 ss to go to the board and make up a new dialouge Go to the board and make up a new dialouge - Ask and answer about personal information Activity 1 - Ask ss to look at the pictures and ask 15’ - Who are they in the picture? Teacher - whole class - Where are they? - What are they doing? - What is the teacher doing? - What are the students doing? - What are they talking about? - Open the tape once. Ask ss to listen and repeat - Explain ss some newwords LE THI HA Family name Middle name First name - Second, open the tape once more. Pause each sentences and ask ss to repeat - Require ss to practice in pairs - Require ss to answer questions Call some ss to answer before class. Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span> Correct mistakes if have a, She is talking to Miss Lien b, Her family name is Pham c, Her middle name is Thi d, She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street - Ask 7 to 10 ss to stand up before the class to introduce themselves using full name, midle name and last name. - Review questions with “Wh” words - Ask ss to look at B2 and read the dialogue * Who are in the conversation? * What are they talking? - In the conversation between Nga and Lan.There is a lack of Wh- questions. Now you complete the conversation by putting the Whin the right place. Activity 2 questions Call some pairs of students to read complete 20’ dialogue.Others listen and remark - Give correct answers - Who, Who, What, Where, How - Ask ss to practice in pair completed dialogues - Repeat the structure and explain if it is necessary. - Who is taht? - Where does she live? How old is she? Repeat ss structures to ask about names, Consolidation -address, age 2’ Wh-questions - Learn by heart new words. by heart new structure. Homework -- Learn Do the exercise. 3’ - Do the exercise. Prepare new lesson. VAdjustment:. Individual. Individual. Pair. Teacher – whole class.. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 23/8/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 27/8/2010. Unit 1: BACK TO SCHOOL Period: 5. Lesson 4 : B. NAMES AND CLASS (B3, B4, B5 I. Objectives: - Học sinh biết cách hỏi khoảng cách giữu hai địa điểm thông qua cấu trúc mới. - Học sinh biết hỏi ai đó đi học, đi làm bằng phiơng tiện gì. - TiÕp tôc luyÖn luyÖn kÜ n¨ng nghe vµ thùc hµnh héi tho¹i theo cÆp, theo nhãm. - RÌn luyÖn kÜ n¨ng giao tiÕp. II. Language content: Grammar or structure: + Ask and answer about distences How far is it from .... to ….?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span> It’s (about) ....meter(s)/ kilometer(s) +Ask and answer about means of transport How + do/ does + S + V-inf + ....? S + V-(s/es + ....+ by + means of transport Vocabulary: Pronunciation: III .The teaching aids: - Chalk & board, textbook, cassette and tape, pictures, exercise book IV. Procedures Stages Content Activities 1. Check old lesson Warm up Call two ss to go to the board. Pair 5’ Ask and answer about name, age, grade, school. - Drill speaking skill - Ask ss to look at this form Teacher - Explain some information such as: name, age, whole class Activity 1 class, home address. - If you want to ask one of your friend’s name 10’ to complete the first line of the conversation, how will you ask? Ex: What is your name? How old are you? Introduce structure about distances Ask ss to look at picture in part 4. And make questions: a.How many people are there in the picture? a.Where are they? c.What are they? First,open the tape.Ask ss to listen and repeat Explains ss structures 1.Ask and answer about distances How far is it from … to …….? It’s(about)….meter(s)/kilometer(s) Activity 2 Ask ss to give examples 15’ Ex: How far is it from your house to school? It’s three kilometers 2.Ask and answer about means of transport How + do/ does + S + V-inf + ....? S + V-(s/es + …...+ by + means of transport Ex How do you go to school? I go to school by car Open the tape, ask ss to listen and repeat in chorus Ask ss to practice in pairs Practice structure Activity 3 How far is it from….to…..? 10’ Ask ss to look at the pictures and say the meanings of the newwords * Market * Movie theater * Post office * Bus stop Now use the structures you learned, let’s ask.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span> Consolidation 3’. Homework 2’. and answer about the ditances between those places Call ss pair of ss to practice in pairs before class Repeat ss the structures - Learn by heart new words. - Learn by heart new structure. - Do the exercise. - Do the exercise. Prepare new lesson.. VAdjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 25/8/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 28/8/2010. Unit 1: BACK TO SCHOOL Period: 6. Lesson 5 : B. NAMES AND CLASS (B6, B7,. I. Objectives: - Học sinh tiếp tục luyện cấu trúc về khoảng cách giữ hai địa điểm thông qua cá dạng bài nghe hiÓu. - TiÕp tôc luyÖn luyÖn kÜ n¨ng nghe hiÓu nh÷ng ®o¹n héi tho¹i dµi vµ cã nhiÒu th«ng tin h¬n. - RÌn luyÖn kÜ n¨ng giao tiÕp. II. Language content: Grammar or structure: + Ask and answer about distences How far is it from …….. to …….? It’s (about) ……..meter(s)/ kilometer(s) Vocabulary: Pronunciation: III .The teaching aids: - Chalk & board, textbook, cassette and tape, pictures, exercise book IV. Procedures Stages Content 1.Check old lesson Warm up Call two ss to go to the board. 5’ Ask and answer about name, age, grade, school. Activity 1 Pre listening - Ask ss to look at the picture. 20’ - Introduce the place in the pictre: Lan’s house, school, post office, market,theater. - Explain some new words: - Distance - Is lan’s house far or near from school? - Is Lan’s house near the market/ the ppost office/ the theater? You will hear four conversation and find out the. Activities Pair Teacher - whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span> Activity 2 15’. Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’. distance between the place mention in the tape. While listening - Play the tape two or three times - Ask ss to give their answer. - Ask other to correct. - Play the tape again, stop each sentence for ss to check. a) School to Lan’s house 300 m. b) Lan’s house to post office 700 m. c) School to movie theater 300 m. d) Movietheater to the postoffice 2 km. Post listening - Ask ss to practice in pair. - Ask ss to build similar dialogue. Ask ss to look at the form part 7 page 18. - explain the information. - Name: - Address: - Means of transport: - Give out the guess: - What is your name ? - Where do you live? - How do you go to school? - How far is it from home to the school? - Ask ss to base on the guee to practice in pairs. And fill in the form.ask ss to read aloud the form. Ask ss to retell the information what they get from their friend. My friend is........he lives at.....on.......... He goes to school by........It is from .......to .... Ask ss to practice in pairs. Individual. Pair. Teacher – whole class. Pair. Individual. Repeat ss the structures - Learn by heart new words. - Learn by heart new structure. - Do the exercise. - Do the exercise. Prepare new lesson.. VAdjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 26/8/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 30/8/2010. Unit 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION Period: 7 Lesson one:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span> telephone number A1, 2 I. Objectives: - Học sinh nắm vững cách xác định các con số trong hệ thống số đếm từ 0 đến 9, học đợc cách đọc và các chữ số phức tạp đứng liền nhau tiếp tục luyện cấu trúc về khoảng cách giữ hai địa điểm thông qua cá dạng bài nghe hiểu. - TiÕp tôc luyÖn luyÖn kÜ n¨ng nghe hiÓu nh÷ng ®o¹n héi tho¹i dµi vµ cã nhiÒu th«ng tin h¬n. - RÌn luyÖn kÜ n¨ng giao tiÕp. II. Language content: Grammar or structure: + Ask and answer about distences How far is it from .... to ...? It’s (about) …..meter(s)/ kilometer(s) Vocabulary: Pronunciation: III .The teaching aids: - Chalk & board, textbook, cassette and tape, pictures, exercise book IV. Procedures Stages Content Check old lesson Call two ss to go to the board. Warm up Ask and answer about name, age, grade, 5’ school. Pre listening - Ask ss to look at the picture. - Introduce the place in the pictre: Lan’s house, school, post office, market,theater. - Explain some new words: - Distance - Is lan’s house far or near from school? - Is Lan’s house near the market/ the ppost office/ the theater? You will hear four conversation and find out the distance between the place mention in the tape. While listening - Play the tape two or three times Activity 1 - Ask ss to give their answer. 20’ - Ask other to correct. - Play the tape again, stop each sentence for ss to check. e) School to Lan’s house 300 m. f) Lan’s house to post office 700 m. g) School to movie theater 300 m. h) Movietheater to the postoffice 2 km. Post listening - Ask ss to practice in pair. - Ask ss to build similar dialogue.. Activities Pair. Teacher – whole class. Individual. Pair Activity 2 15’. - Ask ss to look at the form part 7 page 18. - explain the information. - Name:. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span> - Address: - Means of transport: Give out the guess: What is your name ? Where do you live? How do you go to school? How far is it from home to the school? Ask ss to base on the guee to practice in pairs. And fill in the form.ask ss to read aloud the form. Ask ss to retell the information what they get from their friend. My friend is........he lives at.....on.......... He goes to school by........It is from .......to .... Ask ss to practice in pairs Repeat ss the structures Consolidation 2’ - Learn by heart new words. Homework - Learn by heart new structure. - Do the exercise. 3’ Prepare new lesson. VAdjustment:. Pair. Individual. ............................................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 1/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 6/9/2010 Period: 8. Unit 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION Lesson two: telephone number A3, 4 I/ Objectives. - Häc sinh biÕt c¸ch hái vµ th«ng baã sè ®iÖn tho¹i cña m×nh còng nh cña b¹n bÌ th«ng qua hoạt động 3,4. - BiÕt c¸ch s¾p xÕp mét cuéc hÑn víi b¹n bÌ th«ng qua cÊu tróc: II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: free, see a movie, start, don’t be late. 2, Structures: Will you be free tomorrow? Yes, I’ll. What time will it start? It’ll start at7 o’clock. Where will we meet? We’ll meet in front of the movie theater. III/ Teaching aids. - book, a cassette IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Ask some questions: Teacher – Warm up Do you have a telephone? whole class 5’ What is your telephone number? Do you know how to give your telephone number to others? -Let ss look at the picture and answer the questions. Who are they in the picture?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span> Activity one 15’. Activity two 20’. What are they doing? What are they talking about? Can you guess? Ask ss to look at the picture part 3page 20 Do you often talk with someone on the phone? Do you know how to give your telephone number to other people? You are going to listen to a conversation between Lan and Hoa. They are asking about the telephone number. - Play the tape once - Do you recognize Hoa’s telephone number? - To know the telephone number what does Lan ask? - What is your telephone number. - Play the tape twice. Stop each sentence and ask ss to repeat. - Excuse me is used before you make some one trouble. - The answer yes to express your attitute. - I’ll call you soon. - We use it to express the action wwhat will happen in the future. Ask ss to practice in pair. - ask ss to look at the picture oc part 4 page 21 - who are they in the picture? - They are Phong and Tam. - What are they doing? - They are talking on the phone. - What are they talking about? - Can you guess? - Now look at the coversation and listen to the tape. What are they talking anout? - Plae the tape one time. - Explain new material. Future simple tense. S + Will + V(inf). S + Will +not + V(inf). Will + S + V(inf)? Yes, S + will. No, S + won’t. New word: see a movie. Would you like to come to my house for lunch? Where will we meet? Let’s at Don’t bealte. - Ask ss to give the example. - Ask ss to listen to the tape again then practice in pairs. - After practicing the conversation now you ask the questin about it.. Teacher and whole class.. Pairs. Teacher and whole class.. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span> a) b) c) d). phong and Tam they will see a movie. They will meet at 6.45. They will meet in front of the movie theater.. Consolidation Repeat the main content of the lesson 2’ - Learn by heart new words. Homework - Learn by heart new structure. 3’ - Do the exercise. - Prepare new lesson. V. Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 2/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 6/9/2010 Period: 9. Unit 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION Lesson three: telephone number A5, 6,7 I/ Objectives. - Häc sinh biÕt c¸ch hái vµ th«ng baã sè ®iÖn tho¹i cña m×nh còng nh cña b¹n bÌ th«ng qua hoạt động 3,4. - BiÕt c¸ch s¾p xÕp mét cuéc hÑn víi b¹n bÌ th«ng qua cÊu tróc: - Qua các hoạt động trong bài học sinh biết cáhc dùng các cấu trúc, thì tơng lai đơn giản víi will. - Häc sinh tiÕp tôc rÌn luyÖn kÜ n¨ng nghe vµ hoµn thµnh th«ng tin cßn thiÕu vµo ®o¹n héi tho¹i. - Học sinh biết cách xây dựng cuộc hẹn và sắp xếp bằng Tiếng Anh với đầy đủ những thông tin cần thiết nh làm gì, thời gian, địa điểm. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: free, see a movie, start, don’t be late. 2, Structures: Will you be free + time? Yes, I’ll. What time will it + ? Where will we meet? We’ll meet in front of the movie theater. Let’s meet at + time? III/ Teaching aids. - book, a cassette Stages Contents Activities Asks some questions: Do you have a telephone? Teacher – Warm up What is your telephone number? Do you know how whole class 5’ to give your telephone number to others? Lets sts look at the picture and answer the Activitie one questions. Who are they in the picture? Teacher – 10’ What are they doing? whole class What are they talking about? Can you guess? -Now look at the dialogue and listen to the tape to know what they are talking about. -Plays the tape twice, and asks them repeat -Gives the new words: see a movie, start, great, late, free.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span> Activitie two 20’. Activitie three 5’ Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’. -Have the sts work in pairs. -Have the pairs role- play the dialogue, with one student playing Lan and the other playing Hoa. -Listen to them and correct in pronunciation . -Ask the questions: Who will meet tomorrow? What will they do? What time will they meet? Where will they meet? Pairs Give sentences: - We’ll meet in front of the movie theater. - Would you like to come to my house? - Let’s meet. - Don’t be late. Copy the form onto the board and ask the sts to read it. - Pre- listening, the teacher asks some questions: -Do you sometimes go to the movies? -What do you say to ask your friends to Teacher – go to the movies with you?.... whole class Play the tape and ask one or two sts to come up and fill it out in front of the class. Have the sts cross- check their form with a partner. Make any comments. In order to consolidate speaking on the phone, the teacher asks the sts to make a conversation about themselves. Listen and correct. Then let them read the dialogue, ask the sts to roleplay it. Have one or two pairs make up it in front of the Teacher – class. whole class Ask these questions. Learn by heart Make a conversation with classmates. Write answers into notebooks. Complete the form that is in 21 page. Repeat the main content of the lesson - Learn by heart new words. - Learn by heart new structure. - Do the exercise. Prepare new lesson.. VAjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 3/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 7/9/2010 Period: 10. Unit 2:. PERSONAL INFORMATION Lesson four: My birthday B 1,2,3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span> I/ Objectives. - Häc sinh biÕt nãi vµ viÕt thµnh th¹o sè thø tù , c¸c th¸ng vµ c¸c ngµy trong th¸ng. - Học sinh tiếp tục rèn luyện nghe và viết các ngày tháng đồng thời HS luyện phát âm đúng với số thứ tự, biết phân biệt với số đếm và tạo đợc phản xạ nhanh nahỵ thông qua các trò ch¬i GV thùc hiÖn trong bµi. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: free, see a movie, start, don’t be late. 2, Structures: III/ Teaching aids. - book, cassette Stages Contents Activities Ask the sts to repeat the ordinal numbers, which Group Warm up they learnt in class 6. Then use the part one to introduce the ordinal 5’ numbers. - ask ss to look at the picture part one - ask ss to answer the question to guess the Pair content of the lesson. - Who are they in the picture? - Where are they? - What are they doing? - What is the teacher doing? Individual - What are the student doing? - What are they talking about? Activitie one - Play the tape Read the numbers aloud to the sts 15’ Go around the room, and ask each individual Pair student to read the numbers aloud. Call on some sts read in front of the class. Rewrite the ordinal numbers on the board. Play the tape again and ask the sts to repeat them. Let the sts work with a partner. Listen and make any necessary corrections. Give some numbers and have the sts practice by speaking and writing. 16th, 20th, 31th, 12th, 5 th..... 16, 20, 31, 12, 5..... Explain pronuciation”th”. - Call on the sts read them again. Activitie two Explain the differences from cardinal number and ordinal numbers. 15’ One First (1th) Two Second(2th) Three Third(3th) Four Fourth(4th) Five Fifth(5th) Six Sixth(6th)....... Ask the sts to look at the picture and make a question: Individual What is this? It is a calender. Give the meaning of this word.Now you must listen and write the dates of July. Play the tape twice. Can ask the sts to work in pairs..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span> Activitie three 5’. Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’. Call on some sts who give ideas themselves. Check and give the keys. - The first of July. - The nineteenth. - The sixth. - The fourteenth. - The seventeenth. - The thirty- first. Ask the sts: Now many months are there in a year? What are they? Now you are going to write the months in their correct order, using ordinal numbers. Have the sts work individually. Ask one or two sts to write their answers on the board. Make any necessary corrections. After that, note reading ordinal numbers. Learn by heart ordinal numbers and the months. Write them into notebooks There are 12 months in a year, however, they are not in order. Now you rewrite these month from the first month to the last. - January February March April May June July August September October November December Repeat the main content of the lesson - Learn by heart new words. - Learn by heart new structure. - Do the exercise. Prepare new lesson.. VAdjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 7/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 10/9/2010. Unit 2: Period: 11. PERSONAL INFORMATION Lesson five: My birthday B 4,5. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh tiếp tục học thì tơng lai đơn thông qua các câu hỏi trong đoạn hội thoại với c¸c th«ng tin vÒ ngµy sinh nhËt. - Học sinh đợc học và biết cách dùng một số tính từ nh nẻvóu, happy và cách dùng của giíi tõ chØ thêi gian. : on - HS tiếp tục rèn luyện nghe và đối thoại tự biết điền những thông tin cá nhân cần thiết trong mét thÎ ®¨ng kÝ. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: birthday, date of birth, nervous, worry, worried. 2, Structures: What’s your /her date of birth?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span> When is your / her birthday? - June eighth. I’ll be 14 on my next birthday. III/ Teaching aids. Texbook, cassette and tape, chalk and board IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Warm up 5’. Contents Call ss to go to the board and write the great valentine day of Viet Nam. Activities group. Activity 1 20’. Practicing ask and answer questions about birthday and how to use future simple tense -Ask ss to look at B4 -Introduce situation between Mr.Tan and Hoa +Can you guess what Mr.Tan is asking Hoa? -Open the tape tape once or twice. Ask ss not to look at the book and listen to the tape -Ask ss to give personal information's questions  What's your name?  What's your date of birth?  What's your address?  What's your telephone number? -Open the tape once more and ask ss to find out answers to Mr Tan's questions -Explain ss how to use preposition "on"  On + day/month/year  On+day/ month  On + day Newwords: nervous / Happy. Work in pairs. T – Whole class. -Ask ss to practice the dialogue in pairs -Ask ss to ask and answer questions -Let ss compare answers each other -Call some ss to give correct answers -Remark and give feedback a.He is 13 years old b.He will be 14 on her next birthday c.Her birthday is on June eighth d.Hoa lives with her uncle and aunt e.Hoa is worried because she doesn't have any friends -Ask ss to practice in group.Ask and answer about you groups Activity 2 15’. Ask ss to look at B5 - This form contains Hoa's personal infirmation.You read and complete it - Remark and give feedback Name: Pham Thi Hoa Date of birth: June eighth Address: 12 Tran Hung Dao street Telephone number: 8.262.019 Ask ss to prepare " A student Registration Form" and write information about yourself Consolidation - Repeat structures: Name, age, address, telephone number 2’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span> Homework 3’. - Repeat prepositions: on - Ask ss to learn by heart the dialogue - Ask ss to completepersonal form - Ask ss to prepare new lesson. VAdjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 8/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 11/9/2010. Unit 2: Period: 12. PERSONAL INFORMATION Lesson five: My birthday B 6,7, 8,9. I.Objectives: - Häc sinh n¾m v÷ng tªn vµ c¸c ngµy dïng trong th¸ng, sö dông nh÷ng kiÕn thøc nµy nh©n dÞp sinh nhËt. - HS luyện kĩ năng đọc hiểu thông qua các bài đọc có thông tin về bữa tiệc sinh nhật, đồng thêi lµm quen víi c¸ch tr×nh bµy mét thiÕp mêi sinh nhËt b»ng tiÕng Anh. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: party, invite, finish, hope, join the fun. 2, Structures: My birthday is on....... The party will be at...... III.The teaching aids: Texbook, cassette and tape, chalk and board IV. Procedures Warm up 5’ Activity 1: reading skill 15’. Ask ss to practice the dialogue and fill in the form A. Pre-reading -Ask ss to look at B6 What are they doing in the picture? What is Lan doing? -You are going to read about Lan. Read and find out answers for these questions B. While -listening -Ask ss to read wishperly and answer questions -Call some ss to ask and answer -Remark and give feedback a. She is 12 b. She lives at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet c. Her birthday is on May 25th d.The party will start at five o'clock and finish at nine C. Post-reading -This is the invitation card to Lan's birthday.. Teacher– whole class Individual. Pair. Group.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span> However,There is some incompleted information. You will complete the card to use the information in the reading lesson -Ask ss to compare the results with your parner -Call a good student to read the card and ask ss to translate in to Vietnamese -Remark and give feedback Dear (student's name) I am having a birthday party on Sunday, May 25 th. The party will be at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet street from 5.oo to 9.oo. I hope you will come and join the fun Love, Lan Activity 2 10’ Activity 3 5’ Activity 4 5’ Consoliation 2’ Homework 3’ V.Adjustment:. Individual. Think and write. Imagine you will be a guest at Lan's birthday party. What will you do? -Ask ss to read wishperly in B7 -Now you work in group 5 ,6. Discussing what you will bring to Lan's birthday -Call some ss to practice in work before class. Group. Now write an invitation to your birthday party -Ask ss to read an invitation aloud before class. Individual. Ask ss to read to the tape and repeat Leap year (366 days) Repeat ss the form of the letter and future simple tense. Whole class. Ask ss to write an invitation to your birthday party. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 10/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 13/9/2010. Unit 3: Period: 13. At home. Lesson one:. What a lovely home!( A1,2) I/ Objectives. - HS biÕt c¸ch thÓ hiÖn c¶m xóc qua viÖc lµm quen víi cÊu tróc - HS biết cách miêu tả một căn phòng bằng cách sử dụng các danh từ chỉ đồ vật trong phòng.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span> - C¸c tÝnh tõ miªu t¶. - Häc sinh lutÖn kÜ n¨ng nghe hiÓu råi tr¶ lêi th«ng qua bµi héi tho¹i. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: awful, comfortable, lovely, bright, amazing, convenient, favorite, rest of the house..... 2, Structures: What an awful day! What a bright room! What nice color! III. The teaching aids: Texbook, cassette and tape, chalk and board, picture about beautiful flowers IV. Procedure Stages Contents Activities Ask ss to give pictures in the house Group shower Warm up 5’ dryer furniture. Activity 1 20’. Activity 2 15’. refrigerator How many rooms are there in yur house? What are there in each room? a. Newwords awful (a) khñng khiÕp, tåi tÖ comfortable (a) tho¶i m¸i, dÔ chÞu amazing (a) đáng ngạc nhiên convenient (a) tiÖn lîi modern (a) hiện đại tub (n) bån t¾m shower (n) vßi t¾m hoa sen dryer (n) m¸y sÊy sink (n) chËu, bån röa b¸t refrigerator (n) tñ l¹nh - First read newwords - Call some ss to read newwords before class - Next, open the tape - Call some pairs of ss to practice in pairs - Ask ss to give exclamations What + a/an + adj + N! - Then open the tape, ask ss to listen to the dialogue again - Finally, ask ss to look at "Now answer" to answer the questions in your exercise book - Ask ss to practice in pairs - Remark and feedback a. The livingroom, Hoa's room, the bathroom and the kitchen b. Because it is bright and it has some nice colors: pink and white c. A sink, a tub and a shower d. A washing machine, a dryer, a refrigerator, a dishwasher and an electric stove. - Ask ss to work in pairs, answer questions " about you Speaking compliments and complaints -Ask ss to give a complaint - Remark and give feedback What an awful day! - Ask ss to look at objects in the classroom and say. Group Teacher – whole class.. Individual. Teacher – whole class..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span> complaints or compliments - Ask ss to look at A2 -Now you look at the exercise and write compliments and complaints, using your phrases in your book - Ask ss to speak aloud before class - Remark and give feedback 1a. What an awful restaurant!  What a wet day!  What a boring party!  What a bad movie! 1b. What a great party!  What a bright room!  What an interesting movie!  What a lovely house!  What a delicious dinner! What a beautiful day! Consolidation Repeat exclamations: Complaints and compliment - Things in the house 3’ -Adjectives are used to describe ss to learn by heart newwords Homework -- Ask Ask ss to practice the dialogue and translate into 5’ Vietnamese V.Adjustment:. Individual. Pairs.. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 11/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 14/9/2010. Unit 3:. AT HOME. Period: 14 Lesson 2. A.What a lovely house! (,A3,A4*) I. I/ Objectives. - HS luyÖn thùc hµnh c¸ch dïng c©u c¶m th¸n: What + (a / an) + adj + N! - Miêu tả đồ vật trong căn phòng với câu There is / There are, hỏi về sự hiện hữu của đồ vật b»ng c©u: Is there / Are there . . . ? II/ Language contents. +Grammar Exclamative sentence what + (a / an ) + adj +N  The present simple tense Is there a ….? Are there any …. ? Where ………? Prepositions of place (Review ) +Vocabulary : Words relating to making compliments and complaints furniture in the house III.The teaching aids: textbook, cassette and tape, chalk and board, picture IV. Procedures: Stages Contents Activities 1. This is a lovely living room. 2. It is a sunnyday. Taecher Warm up – whole 3. She is a kind woman. 4. That is an interesting book. 5’ class 5. These are good books. 6. They are nice cats. Activity 1 - Ask ss to look at the picture part 3 and recall the name of 25’ things. Teacher - Teaching vocabulary – whole _ Complain (v) class. _Complaint (n) _Compliment ( v, n ) _Expensive (a)  cheap.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span> _ Wet  dry (a) _Bad  good (a) _Delicious (a) Students write down exclamative sentences expressing complaints (a) ( using cues page 30 ) Students exchange the task with their partners for checking Students read their complaints Giving the correct answers Students write down compliments (b) ( using cues page 31 ) Do the same as (a) Giving some word - cards of adjectives and nouns 2 groups of students make exclamative sentences : one group gives complaints , the other gives compliments _Correcting mistakes and giving remarks and marks Point at a large picture ( encharge from pictures in the text book ) students describe the things in the picture , using There is a ……. There are some _Some students stick the word -cards to the things in the pictures _Pair work: point at the things in the pictures. Ask and answer Ex:What is in the picture? There is a …There are some .… _Look at the picture . Fine the positions of the things in the picture _Pair work S1 Is there a television ?-S2 Yes ,there is S1 Where is it ?- S2 It’s behind the table Review the prepositions on , in , under , near next to , behind , in front of , between Some pairs perform before class , ask and answer about the things and their positions in your living room , bed room or a kitchen Questions _ answers What structure do you need to make complaints or compliments? What + a /an + adj + noun  What a prepositions do you need to answer questions with “where “ Where is It ? It is on / are They ? are in They Write complaints and compliments using these words a lovely garden _a horrible place-a clean room - an interesting book a boring song _ Students read their task - Teacher corrects their task -Now look at the picture and the sentences you have done, ask and answer about things andits position in the picture. - Call some pairs of students to drill asking and answering positions of objects. Use prepositions Activity 2. Ex:SS: Is there a window in the room/ 10’ T:Yes, there is. Where is it? SS: It is behind the TV * Activity 3: Play with words - Open the tape and ask ss to read in chorus Consolidation -Repeat structures and exclamations What +a/an + adj + N ! 2’ Homework -Write 5 sentences about exclamations 3’. Pairs. Group. Group. Pairs. Pairs. Teacherr – whole class. Teacher – whole class. Individual ..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span> V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 12/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 18/9/2010. Unit 3:. AT HOME Period: 15. Lesson 3. B. Hoa's family(B1). I.Objectives: Hs biÕt c¸ch hái vcµ tr¶ lêi vÒ nghÒ nghiÖp theo c¸c cÊu tróc. - Làm quen với lợng từ vựng miêu tả một công việc nhất định nh công việc đồng áng. II.Language contents Grammar +Asking and answering about jobs +What +dose +S +do ? +Making a suggestion “what about ….?” Vocabulary + Farm, countrycide, house work, grow cegetable, raise cattle... III.The teaching aids: Texbook, cassette and tape, chalk and board, picture IV. Procedure Stages Contents Activities Brainstorming Warm up Now tell me what your parents’ jobs 5’ Teacher writes the jobs on the board . Teacher /farmer / house wife / driver / businessman Questions answers. Activity 1 25’. Teacher – whole class.. _We will listen to a dialogue between Lan and Hoa .They are talking about the jobs of Hoa’s parents and what they do everyday _Check (v) the jobs of Hoa’s parents in the list above _Students check the list of the jobs while listening and reading the dialogue _Teacher asks students if there are difficult or new words , and explains them if there are any. New words. Pairs. Farm (n) Countryside (n) Cattle Housework (n) To grow To raise  raise cattle Students listen and repeat after the tape (class splited Group in half to the 2 roles) Pair work (practicing the dialogue in pairs and answering the questions p .33) _Teacher corrections and further questions _In the dialogue , Lan asks Hoa about her mother’s job. _What expression dose she use ? Group _What about ……?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span> Activity 2 10’. Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’ V.Adjustment:. _Some pairs perform before class _Students answer some questions  Your father is a farmer What does he do on a farm?  Your mother is a house wife What dose she do at home ? What do you often do at home ? Questions _answers 1. Look at the dialogue again and review the structures about the jobs What +does +S + do ? What +do +S+ do ? S +(be ) +a/an +job The present simple :habit /daily /activities He grows vegetables and raise cattle What do you say to suggest something ? (What about ….?) Pair work (making similar conversation in B1 using students’ real job - Repeat structures: What + do/does + S + do? S + be + a/an + names of jobs - Learn by heart newwords and structures - Do the homework. Pairs. Pairs. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Ngµy so¹n: 18/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 20/9/2010. Unit 3:. AT HOME. Period: 16. Lesson 4. B. Hoa's family (B2,B3,B4). I/ Objectives: - T×m hiÓu vÒ nghÒ nghiÖp, chñ ®iÓm nghÒ nghiÖp. - Đọc bài về gia đình bạn Hoa. - Kể về gia đình bản thân. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: about the occupations. 2, Structures: The present simple tense with occupations III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span> IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents - Call ss to go to the board and write names of the jobs Warm up engineer 5’ doctor Jobs. Activities Group. nurse. Activity 1 10’. Activity 2 15’. Activity 3 10’. A. Pre-listening - Ask ss to look at 3 pictures and you can what their jobs are - Ask ss to work in groups to talk about each job B. While-listening - Ask ss to read the passage about Lan's family. After that practice with a parner - Call some pairs of students to ask and answer about each person C. Post- listening - Call some ss to read the passage aloud and translate into Vietnamese - Now you do similar to " About you" - You have 4 name of jobs and their definitions on the other side. However, these definitions are mismatched orderly wih the names with the most suitable definitions - Call some ss to stand up in front of class and answer - Correct mistakes if have - Give correct answers: a, A farmer works on a farm b, A doctor takes care of sick people c, A journalist writes for a newspaper d, A teacher teaches in a school Listening - Complete these forms for 3 people in the tape Name: Age: Job: Place of work: - Open the tape twice or three times - Call some ss to answer in front of class - Remark and give feedback a. Name: Tom Age: 26 Job: teacher Place of work: at a high school b. Name: Susan Age: 19 Job: journalist Place of work: for a magazine c. Name: Bill Age: 20 Job: Nurse. Teacher – whole class. Individual. Individual. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span> Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’. Place of work: in a hospital - Repeat the names of jobs - Verbs and adjectives - Ask ss to learn by heart newwords - Ask ss to prepare new lesson. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Ngµy so¹n: 19/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 21/9/2010. Unit 3:. AT HOME. Period: 17 Lesson 5. B. Hoa's family (B5,6) I/ Objectives.- T×m hiÓu vÒ nghÒ nghiÖp, chñ ®iÓm nghÒ nghiÖp. - Kể về gia đình bản thân. - Miªu t¶ c¨n hé dïng so s¸nh h¬n vµ so s¸nh h¬n nhÊt. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: look for, advice, empty, furnished, suitable, 2, Structures: It is expensive. It is more expensive. It is the most expensive. III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan, Prepare books, a tape and a cassette- player. IV/ Teaching procedure. Stages Contents - Call ss to go to the board and write verbs, adjectives and Warm up introduce jobs of each person in the family 5’ * Using comparative and superlative Activity 1: Do you know in a house or an apartment? 20’ Which is more comfortable? - John Robinson is an English teacher from the USA. He is looking for the apartment in Hanoi for his family. He is asking his friend, Nhat, for advice - First, open the tape - Introduce ss comparative and superlative a. Comparative of short adjectives S1 + be + short adjective-er + than + S2 Ex:+ I am taller than you b. Comparative of long adjectives S1 + be + more + long adjective + than + S2 Ex:+I am more beautiful than you +This dress is more expensive than that shirt a. Superlative of short adjectives S + be + the short adjective - est .......... Ex:I am the tallest person in my class d. Superlative of long adjectives S + be + the most + adjective + ........... Activities In®iviual Teacher – whole class. Pairs.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span> Activity 2 15’. Ex;- This is the most expensive dress - Next open the tape twice or three times. Ask ss to listen and answer questions - Call some ss to answer questions in front of class - Remark and correct mistakes if have - Open the tape once more. Pause each sentence and give feedback a. The one at number 27 b. The one at number 79 c. The one at number 79 d. The one at number 27 The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it is the newest of the three apartments. It has two bedrooms, a large morden bathroom and a kitchen - Ask ss to practice once more A. Pre- writing * Vocabulary News(n) Find(v)- found Rather + adj Luckily(adv) Check vocabulary: Rub out and remember B. While -writing - Ask ss to look at B6 What do you see in this part? Why do you know it is a letter? -This is common structrure used in letters - A letter consists of 4 parts  Heading: date  Opening: Dear....... ,  The body of the letter  Closing: Love - You wil read the letter from Mr John to his wife and daughter and complete it by filling the words in the spaces - Ask ss to do exercise and compare the result with a partner - Call some ss to read the letter aloud before class - Remark and give correct answer August 16 Dear Sally and Liz, I have some good news for you. I found a place for us to live in Hanoi. There are some beautiful apartments here. Some are cheap but a lot are expensive. Luckily the nicest apartments is also the cheapest. It has great bedrooms and a large bathroom. The livingroom is rather small, but the kitchen is big so we will eat our dinner there I think this is the best apartment for us because it is near the city center I will write again soon with more news I hope you are both well Love, - Repeat ss structures: comparative and superlative. Individual. Teacher – whole class. Individual. Teacher – whole class. Individual. Consolidation 3’ - Ask ss to translate the dialogue into Vietnamese Homework - Ask ss to do your homework 2’ V.Adjustment:. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 20/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 25/9/2010.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span> Period :18 LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 I/ Objectives. - Gióp häc sinh hÖ thèng l¹i ng÷ ph¸p tõ Unit 1 -> Unit 3, sö dông NP vµo lµm c¸c d¹ng bµi tËp. - HÖ thèng l¹i ng÷ liÖu häc trong 3 bµi. - RÌn luyÖn kü n¨ng lµm bµi tËp, lµm bµi kiÓm tra. + Th× HT§: c¸ch dïng, cÊu t¹o, c¸c tr¹ng tõ. + Các từ để hỏi: What, Where, Which, How... HS: ¤n l¹i tõ v÷ng, ng÷ ph¸p, lµm tríc phÇn L. Focus. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: Review all the vocabulary. 2, Structures: - present simple tense, S + to be + ........./ S + adv + V(s/es) .......... - future simple tense S + will + V-inf ......./ S + won't + V-inf ........ Will +S + V-inf.........?Yes, S + will / No, S + won't occupations , adjectives, prepositions. III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan and Prepare the pictures that are in the books. IV/ Teaching procedures Stages Contents Activities Ask some questions about the students such as: Teacher – Warm up -What do you often do on Monday? whole class 5’ -Where will you do tomorrow? -Will you go to school tomorrow? Teacher – 1. Present simlpe tense whole class - Ask ss to repeat how to use and forms of the present simple tense S + to be + ......... S + adv + V(s/es) .......... 2. Future simple tense - Ask ss to repeat how to use future simple tense and form a) Use: is used to express an action which will happen in the future Individual b) Form:S + will + V-inf ....... S + won't + V-inf ........ Will +S + V-inf.........? Yes, S + will / No, S + won't c) Keywords: tomorrow, tonight, next - Write the thing am will do / will not to do tomorrow 3. Ordinal numbers Presentation - Ask ss to repeat Ordinal numbers 15’ 4. Prepositions Teacher – - Ask ss to remember prepositions: behind, next to, under, whole class in front of, on .... - Look at the pictures and show where the cat is 5. Adjectives - Change adjectives into comparatives and superlatives Adjective Comparative Superlative cheaper expensive The best Individual Stronger 6. Occupations - Ask ss to practice in pairs and guess jobs 7. Is there a ................................? Are there any .........................? 8.Wh-Question words - Ask ss to look at the "Police record" and practice in pairs a. is/lives/are/goes b. are/eat/rides/catches Teacher – Practice.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span> - Do exercises 2. He will do his homework but he won't tidy in the yard - He will see a movie but he won't watch television - He will write to his grandmother but he won't meet Minh - First, Second, Third, Fourth......... a) It's under the table b) It's in front of the chair c) It's behind the TV d) It's next to the bookcase e) It's on the couch 15’ 5.a) A is a cheap toy and B is cheaper but C is the cheapest b) A is an expensive dress B is more expensive C is the most expensive c) A is a good student B is better C is the best 6.b) She is a doctor c) She is a teacher d) He is a farmer - Look at the pictures and complete the sentences - Practice in pairs Tell the sts to write these people’s job titles. -He is a fireman. -She is a doctor. is a teacher. Production -She -He is a farmer. 5’ Ask the sts to repeat reading and writing the ordinal numbers Give some numbers to the sts write: 1 st, 12th, 20th, 33rd,2nd,15th. Consolidation - Repeat ss structures 2’ Homework - Ask ss to do exercisea - Ask ss to prepare new lesson 3’ V.Adjustment:. whole class. Individual. Teacher – whole class Individual. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 22/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /9/2010 Period: 19. kiÓm tra 45 phót I/ Objectives. - Gióp häc sinh cñng cè vµ kh¾c s©u kiÕn thøc c¸c bµi häc tõ Unit 1 -> Unit 3. - Giúp học sinh nắm đợc mức độ nhận thức của học sinh. Tìm ra phơng pháp giảng dạy phï hîp. - RÌn luyÖn kü n¨ng lµm bµi kiÓm tra, bµi thi. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: Review all the vocabulary. 2, Structures: present simple tense, S + to be + .........S + adv + V(s/es) .......... future simple tense will + V-inf ....... won't + V-inf ........ Will +S + V-inf.........? Yes, S + will /No, S + won't occupations , adjectives, prepositions. III/ Teaching aids. GV: Ra đề phù hợp với các đối tợng HS, Phôtô đề ; Ra đáp án, biểu điểm. HS: ¤n l¹i tõ vùng, ng÷ ph¸p. IV. Ma trËn Chủ đề NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Tæng TNKQ TL TL TL 5 5 I. Reading 2 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span> Phonetic II. Language Vocabulary focus Grammar III. Writing. 8. 5 2. 27. 1 8. 2. 6 6. 6.5. 1.5 1.5. 6. 1.5. 13 13 12 38 Tæng 3 4 3 10 * Lu ý: - Ch÷ sè phÝa bªn tr¸i mçi « lµ sè lîng c©u hái, ch÷ sè ë gãc ph¶i phÝa díi lµ tæng sè điểm cho các câu ở ô đó V. Néi dung(Questions) I. Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1.5 marks) 1. My sisterr (be) a teacher. She (teach) in a school in the city center. Everyday she drives a car to work. 2. I often go to school by bike but today I (walk) to school 3. Would you like (see) a movie? 4. Why are you turning on television? - I (watch) cartoons 5. Where will you go tonight ?- I (go) to the movie theater. II. Put the correct comparistion form of the adjectives in brackets (2 marks) 1. I am ......................................student in my class (bad) 2. Winter is ..................................................................Summer (cold) 3. This is ..............................................kitchen I have (convenient) 4. My dress is ...............................................your dress (cheap) 5. Who is ......................................., Lan or you? (intelligent) 6. Living in the country is .......................................................living in the city (friendly) 7. Mary is ...........................................girl of the three sisters (tall) 8. Who is ..........................................student in your school? (beautiful) III. Fill in the blank a suitable preposition (1 mark) 1. My old school is different ............................my new school 2. Who will take care ..................sick people? 3. My father works ....................the farm in the countryside 4. My birthday is .................October 2 IV. Choose the best answer (2 marks) 1. Red is my ...........color A. like B. lovely C. favorite D. nice 2. Is this your first time in Hanoi?- No, it isn’t. It’s.....time A.two B. second C. the second D. first 3. Which is the fourth month of the year? .......... A. January B. May C. April D. August 4.My ..........name is Thi A. family B. full C. middle D. last 5. ...........................a beautiful day! A. When B. What C. Where D. Why 6. I like coffee, and ...............do my parents A. too B. so C. but D. because 7. Her mother is a.............. She works on the farm A.worker B. farmer C. doctor D. nurse 8. Come in and ................a seat A. have B. give C. do D. get V. Rewrite the following sentence tha has the same meaning (1.5 marks) 1. Where does your uncle live?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span> What.......................................................................? 2. The room is very dirty What......................................................................! 3. No one in my class is taller than Hoa Hoa............................................................................................................................... 4. My motorbike is newer than your motorbike Your motorbike ........................................................................................................... 5. There is a bedroom, a bathroom, a kitchen and a livingroom in my house My house......................................................................................................................... 6. Do you have a cheaper refrigerator than this? Is this ............................................................................................................................? VI. Read the passage. Then answer the questions (2 marks) Back to school The summer holidays are just over. During the last week of the holidays all students get ready for school. They go to the bookstore to buy pencils, pen, paper, new books and copybooks. On the first day of school they are glad to meet all their friends again and tell them about the holidays. After that they go into class. It is so hard to keep quiet and pay attention to their teacher. Mr Brown, their English teacher, always says with a cheerful laugh “ You forget more in three months than you learn in a year !”. * Questions. 1. When do all students get ready for school? 2. Where do they buy school things? 3. Are they happy to meet all their old friends again? 4. What do they tell them about? 5. What does their English teacher always say? V. Keys (§¸p ¸n) * Questions. I. Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1.5 marks) 1. is/ teaches 2. am walking 3. to see 4. am going to watch 5. will go II. Put the correct comparistion form of the adjectives in brackets (2 marks) 1. the worst 2. colder than 3. the most convenient 4. cheaper than 5. more intelligent 6. friendlier 7. the tallest 8. the most beautiful III. Fill in the blank a suitable preposition (1 mark) 1. My old school is different ......from......................my new school 2. Who will take care ...........of.......sick people? 3. My father works .....on..the farm in the countryside 4. My birthday is .......on......October 2 IV. Choose the best answer (2 marks) 1. A. like B. lovely C. favorite D. nice 2. A.two B. second C. the second D. first 3. A. January B. May C. April D. August 4. A. family B. full C. middle D. last 5. A. When B. What C. Where D. Why 6. A. too B. so C. but D. because 7. A.worker B. farmer C. doctor D. nurse.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span> 8. A. have B. give C. do D. get V. Rewrite the following sentence tha has the same meaning (1.5 marks) 1. Where does your uncle live? What.....is your uncle’s address....? 2. The room is very dirty What......a dirty room...............! 3. No one in my class is taller than Hoa Hoa.....is the tallest (student/ person). in my class 4. My motorbike is newer than your motorbike Your motorbike ...is older than my motorbike 5. There is a bedroom, a bathroom, a kitchen and a livingroom in my house My house...has a bedroom, a bathroom, a kitchen and a livingroom 6. Do you have a cheaper refrigerator than this? Is this ...the best refrigerator you have...................................................? VI. Read the passage. Then answer the questions (2 marks) 1. During the last week of the holidays all students get ready for school. 2. They go to the bookstore to buy pencils, pen, paper, new books and copybooks 3. Yes, they are 4. They tell them about the holidays 5. Mr Brown, their English teacher, always says with a cheerful laugh “ You forget more in three months than you learn in a year !”. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Ngµy so¹n: 22/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /9/2010 Period: 20 ch÷a bµi kiÓm tra 1 tiÕt. I/ Objectives (Môc tiªu) - Qua bai hoc, hoc sinh se co the su dung cac ngu lieu da hoc de thuc hanh lam bai tap va luyen mot so ki nang. II/ Language contents(kiÕn thøc ng«n ng÷) 1, Vocabulary: Review all the vocabulary. 2, Structures: present simple tense, future simple tense, occupations, adjectives, prepositions. III. The teaching aids. Chalk & board IV/ Procedures (tiÕn tr×nh) Stage Content Warm up What is the weather like today? 2’ What are you doing? Repeat the 1, Vocabulary: Review all the vocabulary. main 2, Structures: knowledge *Present simple tense. 10’ S + to be + ......... S + adv + V(s/es) .......... *Future simple tense S + will + V-inf ....... S + won't + V-inf ......... Activity.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span> Will +S + V-inf.........? Yes, S + will /No, S + won't *Occupations *Adjectives *Prepositions. Correct the * Questions. test I. Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1.5 marks) 30’ 1. is/ teaches 2. am walking 3. to see 4. am going to watch 5. will go II. Put the correct comparistion form of the adjectives in brackets (2 marks) 1. the worst 2. colder than 3. the most convenient 4. cheaper than 5. more intelligent 6. friendlier 7. the tallest 8. the most beautiful III. Fill in the blank a suitable preposition (1 mark) 1. My old school is different ......from......................my new school 2. Who will take care ...........of.......sick people? 3. My father works .....on..the farm in the countryside 4. My birthday is .......on......October 2 IV. Choose the best answer (2 marks) 1.C. favorite 2.C. the second 3.C. April 4.C. middle 5.B. What 6.B. so 7.B. farmer 8. A. have V. Rewrite the following sentence tha has the same meaning (1.5 marks) 1. Where does your uncle live? What.....is your uncle’s address....? 2. The room is very dirty What......a dirty room...............! 3. No one in my class is taller than Hoa Hoa.....is the tallest (student/ person). in my class 4. My motorbike is newer than your motorbike Your motorbike ...is older than my motorbike 5. There is a bedroom, a bathroom, a kitchen and a livingroom in my house My house...has a bedroom, a bathroom, a kitchen and a livingroom 6. Do you have a cheaper refrigerator than this? Is this ...the best refrigerator you have...................................................? VI. Read the passage. Then answer the questions (2 marks) 1. During the last week of the holidays all students get ready for school. 2. They go to the bookstore to buy pencils, pen, paper, new books and copybooks 3. Yes, they are 4. They tell them about the holidays.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span> Evaluate student’s test 2’. 5. Mr Brown, their English teacher, always says with a cheerful laugh “ You forget more in three months than you learn in a year Líp Giái Kh¸ Trung YÕu KÐm b×nh 7A 7B. Homework - Ask ss to prepare new lesson 1’ V/ Adjustment:. Ngµy so¹n: 27/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 4:. At School Period: 21. Lesson 1: A. Schedules (A1,A2,A3). I/ Objectives. - Häc sinh n¾m v÷ng c¸ch hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ thêi gian qua cÊu tróc: What time is it? It's + giê. + Các từ "to" chỉ giờ hơn ; "past" để chỉ giờ hơn. - Học sinh nắm vững cách hỏi và trả lời xem ai đó làm gì vào lúc mấy giờ qua cấu trúc: What time do / does + S + V? - Qua viÖc nghiªn cøu mét thêi gian biÓu, HS häc tªn c¸c m«n häc b»ng tiÕng Anh. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: The subjects . 2, Structures: What time is it now? It’s 7 o’clock. It’s five past two/ It’s five to two. What time do you get up? I get up at five o’clock. III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a lock. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities How are you today? Teacher – Warm up What is the weather like today? whole class 3’ -Do you like English/ Math.......? -When do you have English/Math.....? Activity 1 10’. *: Review ss how to ask and answer about the time. Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span> Activity 2 10’. Activity 3 15’. What time is it? What time do you go to school? - Ask ss to repeat forms - Remark and give feedback + Form: What time is it? a) It's + hour + o'clock b) It's + hour + minutes c) It's + minutes + past/to + hour - Notice: half = thirty A quarter = fifteen - You will hear the tape saying the different time you listen and repeat - First, open the tape. Ask ss to repeat in chorus - Second, open the tape. Ask ss to repeat in chorus - Call some ss to read aloud in front of class - Now practice saying the time with a partner *: Practice how to ask for and state the time What do you usually do everyday? What time do you do these thing? - Answer questions about you Ex: What time do you get up? : Drill ss listening skill to get information to fill in the schedule A. Pre- listening - Ask ss to look at A3 Do you know what time it is ? - Ask ss to repeat subjects. - Introduce ss subjects Physics: VËt lý Physical Education: ThÓ dôc - This schedule lacks some information: They are either names of subjects or time of the lesson - Now you listen to it and write the needed information. B. While- listening - Ask ss to prepare to listen to the tape - Open the tape twice or three times - Compare the results with a parner - Call some ss to read the results aloud before class - Give correct answers Friday 7.00 7.50 8.40 9.40 10.30 English Geography Music Physics History 1.00 Physical Education. Saturday 2.40 3.40 Math English. - Repeat ss how to ask and answer about the times -Ask ss to learn by heart subjects - Ask ss to prepare new lesson. –. Whole class Individual. Pairs. Teacher whole class. –. Teacher = whole class. 4.40 Physics. C. Post- lisening - Talk about subjects at school Consoliations 2’ Homework 3’ V.Ajustment:. Teacher whole class. Individual.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span> ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................................................................................................... ……………. Ngµy so¹n: 28/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 4:. At School Period: 22. Lesson 2: A. Schedules (A4,A5). I/ Objectives. - Học sinh nắm đợc cách hỏi và trả lời xem ai đang làm gì bằng cách sử dụng thì HTTD: What + be + S + doing? S + be (am, is, are) + V-ing. - §ång thêi häc sinh còng n¾m v÷ng c¸ch hái vµ tr¶ lêi xem ai thêng lµm g×, lóc nµo qua viÖc sö dông th× HT§. What time + do / does + S + V? - S + V (s, es). II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: other, subject, interesting, important, difficult. 2, Structures: What + be + S + doing? S + be + V-ing+ ... + Ask and answer about actions which happens everyday What time + do/does + S + V-inf ......? S + V-inf + ...... What is she doing? She is studying Physic. What time does she have her Physic class? - She has her Physic class at 8.40 III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare pictures, a tape and a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Call on one st and ask him/ her to write the Teacher – Warm up: names of subjects. whole class 5’ Ask some questions ; -Do you like English/ Math.......? -When do you have English/Math.....? Write the names of subjects and answer the questions. -Yes/ No... -I have English ...on Monday, Thursday and Saturday. Activity 1: 15’. - Ask and answer about the time - Ask ss to look at the pictures in part A4 and tell names of activities - Ask ss to look at the examples Ex1: What is Lan studying? She is studying Physics Ex2: What time does Lan have her Physics class? She has her Physics class at 8.40 - Review ss the present progressive tense. Pair Teacher whole class. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span> Activity 2 15’. Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’. - Question with "what" What + be + S + doing? S + be + V-ing + ........ - Review ss the present simple tense What time + do/does + S + V-inf ? S + V-inf+ ..........+ at ......... - Ask ss to practice in pairs: Remark and correct mistakes if have Drill speaking skill Do you know/have your daily and weekly schedule? Do you usually follow the schedule? - Ask ss to look at A5 - Open the tape once - Explain structures 1. Ask and answer about time When/ What time + do/does + S + V-inf? 2. Ask and answer about your own favorite subjects What + is + one's favorite subject? 3. Structures: "too" - "Too" stands at the end of the sentences. It expresses agreement - Open the tape twice or three times. Pause each sentences and explain - Ask ss to practice in pairs before class - Ask ss to write your schedule in your exercise book - After finishing writing , use structurea in the lesson to ask and answer about your schedule - Review the present progressive tense and the present simple tense - Ask ss to make up similar dialogue - Ask ss to do your homework - Ask ss to prepare new lesson. Whole class Individual. Pair Teacher whole class. –. Whole class Individual. V.Ajustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Ngµy so¹n: 29/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 4:. At School Period: 23. Lesson 3: : A. Schedules (A6,A7*) I/ Objects. - HS biÕt nãi vÒ sù kh¸c biÖt gi÷a 2 ngêi, gi÷a 2 vËt, 2 hiÖn tîng qua cÊu tróc: S1 + be + different + from + S2. - Học sinh biết đợc sự khác nhau giữa hệ thống, mô hình giáo dục của Mỹ và Việt Nam qua viÖc so s¸nh miªu t¶ lÞch häc tËp. - Luyện kỹ năng đọc hiểu. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: little, different from, uniform, hour, cafeteria, snack, popular, activity, baseball..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span> 2, Structures: different from..... III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare some pictures of schools in USA and Vietnam. IV/ Teaching procedures Stages Contents - Call two ss to go to the board and check your Warm up timetable 5’ Activity 1 25’. Activity 2 10’. - USA = the United States of America In America, which country has capital city as Washington DC? - What do you think about USA? - What do you know/ want to know about USA? - Ask ss to look at the title "Schools in USA" - You will read a passage about schools in America and decide the statements are true or false - Ask ss to read and compare the results with a partner - Ask ss to read answers aloud before class and correct mistakes if have - Give correct answers a) T b) F (There are no lessons on Saturday) c) F (One break is in the morning, the other is in the afternoon) d) T e) F (The school cafeteria opens at lunch time and also at break) f) F (Basketball is one of the most popular after school activities) - Ask ss to read the dialogue again and explain newwords To be different from: kh¸c víi c¸i g× School uniform: đông phục trờng học Start: b¾t ®Çu End: kÕt thóc A 20- minute break: giê ra ch¬i 20 phót School cafeteria: qu¸n ¨n tù phôc vô Snacks: mãn ¨n nhÑ, ¨n nhanh Popular: phổ biến (đợc yêu thích) After-school activities: các hoạt đông sau giê häc (ngo¹i kho¸) * Activity 2 - Groupwork - Talk about the different between schools in the USA and schools in Vietnam Play with words - Open the tape twice or three times. Ask ss to listen and repeat in chorus - Explain newwords Home Economics: Kinh tế gia đình The world changes: Thế giới thay đổi. Activities Teacher – whole class Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual. Teacher – whole class. Group. Pair Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span> Rivers and mountain ranges: Nh÷ng dßng s«ng vµ rÆng nói Several: mét vµi Consolidation 2’. - Learn by heart the dialogue. Homework 3’. - Rewrite the passage and translate into Vietnamse - Ask ss to do your homework - Ask ss to prepare new lesson. V.Ajustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Ngµy so¹n: 30/9/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 4:. At School Period: 24. Lesson 4: The Library (B1, B2 ). I/ Objectives. - HS biÕt c¸ch nãi vÒ c¸c lo¹i s¸ch phôc vô cho viÖc häc tËp ë c¸c th viÖn b»ng c¸ch sử dụng từ và cấu trúc và đại từ chỉ định (this - that - these - those), ôn lại các giới từ chỉ vị trÝ vµ cÊu tróc c©u víi these vµ have, has. + There is / are + something + at + somewhere. / + S + has / have + sth. - Qua tiết học, học sinh nắm đợc một số lời yêu cầu thông dụng thờng đợc dùng trong th viÖn cïng vèn tõ liªn quan. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: As you can see, rack, reader, on the left, on the right,at the back of. 2, Structures: These shelves on the left have math and sience books. There are readers, novels and dictionaries. There is a book on the table. III/ Teaching aids. -Make a plan, Prepare a picture of the library. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Ask the sts to speak the differences between schools Teacher – Warm up in the USA and Vietnam. whole class 5’ Make some questions about subjects: How many subjects do learn at school? Which subjects do you like best? Where do you go, if you want to borrow books? Now we will visit a library by reading these following passages. Ask s to look at the pictures and ask: Activity 1  What is it in the picture? Pair 25’  Where do you usually see it?  Does your school have library? Teacher –  What do you usually do wen you go to.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span> Activity 2 10’. Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’. library?  Who usually helps you find the books in the library? - Introduce ss newwords Library: ngêi qu¶n thñ th viÖn Rack: gi¸ dì Shelf: gi¸ s¸ch Science book: s¸chkhoa häc (chemistry, physics,.) Dictionary: tõ ®iÓn Readers: ngời đọc Novel: tiÓu thuyÕt Reference books: s¸ch tham kh¶o At the back of: ë phÝa sau * Check vocabulary: Rub out and remember - You will listen to a conversation between students and the librarian. She is showing the position of the books, newspapers and magazines. - Open the tape twice or three times - Call some pairs of students to read aloud in front of class - Ask ss to work in pairs to anwers questions - Call ss to answer questions: Remark and give correct answers a) The magazines are on the racks (near the science books) b) The newspapers are on the racks (near the history book) c) The Math and Science books are on the shelf on the left d) The History and Geography books, dictionaries and Literature in Vietnamese are on the shelf on the right e) The books in English are at the back of the library f) The library opens at 7 a.m g) The library closes at 4.30 p.m - Practice in pairs : Ask and answer the place to find the books, newspapers in the library - Open the tape and ask ss to listen to the dialogue - Explain structures Where can I find + name of the books , please ? Do you have + name of the books + here ? * Answers: S + is/are + phrase of preposition You are welcome is used to reply thanks words - Ask ss to practice in pairs to answer questions - Repeat names of many kinds of books in the library -Repeat "Demonstrative" and "preposition of position" Ask ss to write the dialogue in the exercise book and translate into Vietnamese -Ask ss to prepare new lesson. V.Ajustment: Ngµy so¹n: 3/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. whole class. Whole class Individual. Teacher – whole class. Group. Pair Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span> Unit 4: Period: 25. At School Lesson5: The Library (B3,B4). I/ Objectives. - Giúp học sinh ôn luyện khắc sâu từ vựng liên quan đến chủ điểm th viện trờng học. - Qua bµi h¸t vui nhén A5 -> gi¸o dôc h×nh thµnh ý thøc gi÷ g×n th viÖn trêng häc, lßng yªu thích đọc sách. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: receive, contain, million, employee, rocket, spare, adventure. 2, Structures: It is in Washington of theUSA. It has over 100 million of books.  Where can I find + name of the books , please?  Do you have + name of the books + here? + How to order magazines, books in the library III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Label the shelves and racks on the board, ask the sts Teacher – Warm up to write the location of the books. whole class 5’ Show the picture that is in the book and ask: Do you know which the largest library in the world is? Activity 2: Drill listening skill Activity 1 - Ask ss to look at the pictures in B3 Pair 25’ - Now let's guess the position of the racks and shelves of the books in the library - Call some groups to give answers Teacher – - Now ask ss to listen to the tape snd label the whole class shelves and racks in your exercise book - Open the tape twice or three times - Remark and give correct answers - Call some ss to read the results aloud 1. Study area 2. Science + Math 3. Geography Whole class 4 + 5. Newspapers and Magazines 6 + 7. English 8. Librarian's desk Individual - Ask ss to practice to talk again the positions of the books Now we’ll read silently about the largest library in Activity 2 the world and answer the question: Which is the Pair 10’ largest library in the word? Go around the class to help students reading. Have one or two students read the passage in font of Teacher – the class, listen and make any necessary corrections whole class to pronunciation. Have students write the answers in their notebooks, then ask them to compare with a partner. Call some students reading these answers loudly in front of the class. After that, give the corrects answers: -It is in Washington D.C, the capital of the USA. -It has over 100 million books.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span> -It has 1,000 km of shelves. -Because it receives copies of all American books. Have students read again these answers. Now explain the new words: Congress, capital, receive, contain, employee. Have students work in pairs by making and answering again the questions, and then ask them to practice in front of the class. Listen and correct their mistakes Make some questions about the local library: Which is the largest library in Vietnam? Where is it? Did you come there? When or How often? Do you like it? Why? Ask students repeat the positions that are in unit 4. Use the picture that is in A1 to make question Where Make a conversation about the library: -Is there a library in your school? - Is it big? - How often do you go there? -Where can you find the Math books? -Do you know which the largest library in the world?/ in Vietnam? Tell some things about it. Listen and correct their mistakes if they have. Read B5. Rewrite and translate the passage into Vietnamese. Consolidation Ask ss to learn by heart newwords - Repeat prepositions: on, behind, next to, in 2’ - Ask ss to learn by heart newwords Homework - Ask ss to prepare new lesson 3’ - Ask ss do your homework V.Ajustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 4/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 5:. Work and play. Period: 26. Lesson 1: A. In Class (A1). I/ Objectives. - Häc sinh biÕt c¸ch miªu t¶ c«ng viÖc cña mét b¹n häc sinh ë trêng, sö dông th× hiÖn tại đơn để diễn tả những công việc lặp đi lặp lại cùng tên các môn học. - Hỏi đáp về các hoạt động trong giờ học - Luyện kỹ năng nghe + nhắc lại, nâng cao khả năng đọc hiểu. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - To learn about - To use  how to use - To be interested in - A map (n) - An experiment (n) - Computer science (n) 2. Grammar : Review the present simple tense..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span> III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Greetings Warm up - Ask Ss some questions 5’ + How many days a week do you go to school ? + What time do you go to school ? + What time do classes start ? + How many subjects do you learn ? + What is your favorite subject ?  Remark then lead in new lesson 2. New activities: a. Listen and read: - Introduce the lesson,then explain some new words +to learn about (v) Activity 1 25’. Activity 2 10’. A. Pre-reading How many days a week do you go to school? What time do classes begin? How many subjects do you study? - In this lesson, you will know how to answer these questions exactly and clearly - Introduce ss newwords before reading Computer science: M«n tin häc To be interested in: quan tâm đến điều gì Map: bản đồ Difficult: khã Do experiments: lµm thÝ nghiÖm - Read first. Ask ss to listen and repeat - Call some ss to read again before class * Check vocabulary: "Rub out and remember". Activities Teacher – whole class. Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual. While- reading - Open the tape twice or three times. Ask ss and Pair repeat in chorus - Call some students to read aloud before class - Remark and correct mistakes if have Teacher – whole - Ask ss to work in pairs. Ask and answer five class questions about Mai * Questions A: What does Mai study in her Geography class? (She studies map and learns about different countries) B: What is Mai favorite class? (Her favorite class is Computer Science) - Go around class to help if necessary - Ask ss to work in pairs to ask answer questions 1. What school does Mai go to? 2. What grade is Mai in? 3. How many days a week does Mai go to school? 4. What time do classes begin? 5. What time do they finish? 6. What does Mai think about Geography? 7. What is her lesson today?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span> Consolidation Ask ss to learn by heart newwords - Repeat prepositions: on, behind, next to, in 2’ Homework 3’. - Ask ss to learn by heart newwords - Ask ss to prepare new lesson - Ask ss do your homework. V.Ajustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 10/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 5: Period: 27. Work and play Lesson 2: A. In Class (A2,A3). I/ Objectives. - Học sinh có thể miêu tả sở thích học tập và khả năng của ai đó qua hàng loạt từ, cụm tõ nh: be interested in, repair, household, appliance... - Đọc bài về bạn Ba, nói, hỏi đáp về bạn Ba. - GD häc sinh cã niÒm yªu thÝch, say mª häc tËp, biÕt lËp cho m×nh mét íc m¬, mét niÒm say mª, v¬n tíi khoa häc, v¬n tíi t¬ng lai. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : Enjoy, Electronics,Household appliances, Fix, Light,To be good at,Drawing,Artist 2. Grammar : Review the present simple tense. III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Play a game : lucky numbers Teacher – whole Warm up 1. What ‘s Ba ‘s favorite subject ? class 5’ 2. Lucky number 3. Does Ba like other subject at school? 4. What does Ba learn to do in Electronics class ? 5. LN 6. Is Ba good at fixing things ? 7. What does Ba do in his freetime ? 8. LN 9. What’s your favorite subject ? 10.What do yo do in your freetime ? - Remark . Pre- reading Activity 1 - Ask ss to look at pictures in part 2 and Pair 25’ introduce This is Ba. What is he doing in the first picture? in the second one? Teacher – whole - You will read a passage about Ba, you scan it class and tell me what the main idea of the passage is. - Introduce ss newwords before reading.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span> Enjoy: thÝch, yªu thÝch Electronics: m«n ®iÖn d©n dông Household appliances: các thiết bị gia đình Fix: söa ch÷a Light: bóng đèn To be good at: giái (vÒ c¸i g×) Drawing: b¶n vÏ Artist: ho¹ sü *Check vocabulary: "Slap the board" - Open the tape twice or three times Activity 2 - Call some ss to read aloud before class 10’ - Ask ss to translate into Vienamese - Remark and feedback a) Ba likes electronics best b) Yes, he does. He enjoys school very much c) He learns to repair household appliances d) He will be able to fix his own appliances e) Yes, he is. His drawings are very good 1. Read. Then answer - Introduce the aims of the lesson : Read the dialogue then find out the answer for the question - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in silent - Explain some new words to Ss + To cost (v) : trÞ gi¸ + Right (adj) : §óng + Price (n) : gi¸ + Proplem (n) : vấn đề + To erase (v) : xãa, tÈy - Have Ss read new words in chorus and invidually - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to read the question and find out the answers - Call on some students to give the answers - Correct then give the correct answer  One banana costs 600 dong Consolidation Ask ss to learn by heart newwords - Repeat prepositions: on, behind, next to, in 2’ Homework 3’. Whole class Individual. Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual. Whole class Individual. - Ask ss to learn by heart newwords - Ask ss to prepare new lesson - Ask ss do your homework. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 11/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 5:. Work and play. Period: 28. Lesson 3: A. In Class (A4,5,6). I/ Objectives..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span> - học sinh học các môn học cụ thể trong trờng, nói mỗi môn các em sẽ đợc học những gì víi c¸c tõ liªn quan. - Nâng cao kỹ năng đọc hiểu II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - Essay (n) - Past and present event - Author (n) - Graph (n) - Equation (n) - Globe (n) - Caculator (n) 2. Grammar : Review the present simple tense. III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Greetings Teacher – whole Warm up - Have Ss play agame : class 5’ Hangman : - Literature , History , English - Remark Activity 1 A. Pre - listening Pair - Ask ss to look at the pictures in part 4 and 10’ answer questions What are the pictures about? Teacher – whole (Geography, Physical education.........) class Which subjects do you like best? - Can you guess what subjects Ba and Hoa do on Saturday morning? B. While- listening - First, open the tape. Ask ss to listen and choose Whole class Hoa and Ba's subjects on Saturday - Next, open the tape. Ask ss to match words with subjects Individual - Compare the results with a partner - Call some ss to read answers loudly before class. Ask ss to remark - Open the tape the last time. Check the answers Ba: d, a, e Hoa: c, b, e C. Post-listening - Ask ss to practice in pairs to talk about classes How many subjects do you study at school? Activity 2 What do you study in each subject? Pair 25’ Which subject do you like/ dislike? - Ask ss to look at part 5 - Ask ss to scan main idea of the passage Teacher – whole - Make questions with the content of the lesson class What do you study in Literature, History...........? - Ask ss to look at "Now discuss with a partner" We have 4 names of the subjects in accordance with relevant words about each subject. You will find one irrelavant word and odd one out - Explain newwords Author: t¸c gi¶ Paintings: c¸c bøc vÏ, bøc tranh Basketball games: m«n bãng ræ Famous people: nh÷ng ngêi næi tiÕng.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span> World events: c¸c sù kiÖn quèc tÕ Important days: nh÷ng nhµy quan träng Preposition: giíi tõ Temperature: nhiệt độ In literature, which word do you odd out? (We odd "paitings" out) So in which subject do we learn about paintings? (We learn about paitings in Art) Or why do you odd "paintings" out? Because we learn about paitings in Art not in Literature - Give correct answers Literature - Paintings History - Basketball games Science - Preposition English - England - Ask ss to read again and translate into Vietnamese *- Physical education - games, running shoes, ball Georgaphy - map, globe, atlas Music - piano, guitar, songbooks Art - paint, pencils, paper Math - graphs, equations, calculator - Explain newwords Globe: quả địa cầu Atlas: sách bản đồ Songbooks: s¸ch c¸c bµi h¸t Graphs: đồ thị Equations: c«ng thøc Consolidation Ask ss to learn by heart newwords 2’ Homework 3’. - Ask ss to learn by heart newwords - Ask ss to prepare new lesson - Ask ss do your homework. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span> Ngµy so¹n: 13/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 5:. Work and play. Period: 29. Lesson 4: B. It’s time for recess B1,2. I/ Objectives. - học sinh học 1 số hoạt động trong giờ ra chơi - Ôn lại thì hiện tại tiếp diễn và thì hiện tại đơn. - Nâng cao kỹ năng đọc hiểu. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - To chat (v) - To ring (v) - To skip rope - Bell(n) - Blind man’s bhaff - Marbles - Catch (n) - Recess 2. Grammar : Review : The present continuous tense Review the present simple tense. III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan, Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents - Call ss to go to the board and write newwords Warm up - Call other ss to ask: What do you study in 5’ History? Activity 1 25’. - Ask ss to look at pictures and ask Where are the children? What are they doing? When do they usually do these games? - You will hear the tape describing various after school activities at a recess - Open the tape. Ask ss not to look at the book - Explain newwords and structures in the tape Bell: c¸i chu«ng Yard: s©n Recess: giê ra ch¬i Chat: nãi chuÖn, t¸n gÉu Blindman's bluff: trß ch¬i bÞt m¾t b¾t dª Catch: trß ®uæi b¾t. Activities Teacher – whole class. Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span> Play marbles: ch¬i bi Skip rope: nh¶y d©y Go indoors: ®i vµo líp - Open the tape: Notice how to pronouce - Look at the pictures again, practice in pairs to ask and answer questions A: What is the boy doing? B: He is playing catch A: What are these children doing? B: They are talking - Review ss "present progressive tense" a) Use: it is used to express an action which is happening at the speaking time S + be + V-ing S + be + not + V-ing Be + S + V-ing ? Yes, S + be No, S + be + not - Ask ss to practice in pairs. Ask and answer depend on pictures - Call some pairs of students to stand up and read the text again and translate into Vietnamese - Ask ss to look at 1b: Ask and answer questions with a partner Activity 2 10’. You will hear the tape about Mai, Kien, Lan, Ba. They are at recess. Now you listen to the tape and Pair decide which games each student plays by matching the names on the left column with the activities on the right one Teacher – whole - Open the tape twice or three times if necessary class - Ask ss to read the results: Others remark - Give correct answers Mai is playing catch Kien is playing blindman's bluff Lan is skipping rope Ba is playing marbles. Consolidation - Repeat the acivities of American students at recess 2’ - Names of activities at recess in Vietnam. Homework 3’. - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each - Do exercise 2 at pgae 31 -.Ask ss to learn by heart newwords - Repeat prepositions: on, behind, next to, in -. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Ngµy so¹n: 15/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 5:. Work and play.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span> Lesson 5:. Period: 30 It’s time for recess B3,4. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh sẽ đợc học về các hoạt động vui chơi của các bạn học sinh Mỹ, từ đó so sánh với các hoạt động của mình qua bài đọc với các từ nh basketball, CD player... - Học sinh nâng cao kỹ năng đọc hiểu qua bài đọc (đọc và chọn câu trả lời đúng). II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - Pen pal (n) - Junior high school (n) - Energetic (adj) - To swap (v) - To score goal - Portable (adj) - Earphone (n) - To relax(v) 2. Grammar : Review : The present continuous tense Review the present simple tense. III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Content Activitties Warm up. Makes questions for students: - Whole class 5 minutes -What do you usually do at recess? -Do you play skipping rope...? -What do you like/ dislike doing? -What do Vietnamese students often do at recess? -Do you know what students in the USA often do at recess? Pre-reading 10 minutes. While-reading 15 minutes. Post-reading 10 minutes. * In order to know exactly what American - Individual students usually do at recess, now let’s read part 3 (page 57) Have students look at the picture and give some new words by asking some questions: -What is he doing? He is scoring goals. That is called “ Shooting some hoops” -What are they doing? They are listening to music. They have an earphone. pen pal. (tranlation) take part in=join in energetic(a) (translation) portable. (a) (translation) swap = change(v) trao đổi relax (v) (translation) ngØ ng¬i - Check vocab: Rub out and remember * Have students read the text in front of the - Groupwork class and correct their mistakes if they have. Listen to students’ keys and give correct answers: a. C c. D b. A d. D Ask students to read full answers. *4/ Give the papers to students and explain - Groupwork doing this exercise. After that, ask students to speak The main activities of your class..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span> Make questions for students: -What do you usually do at recess? -Do you like playing............? -What do the students in Vietnam/ in USA do at recess? Then ask students to play this game. Explain playing it: You must write the games that you have just known in Vietnam and in USA. Two groups, if the group writes more and faster, the group will win. Homework 5 minutes. * Get Ss to learn by heart the remember + Do exercises at home. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Ngµy so¹n: 16/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 6: Period: 31. After school Lesson 1: A. What do you do A1. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh biết cách nói về những hoạt động sau giờ học, dùng các trạng từ chỉ tần suất (nh usually, often, sometimes...) - Học sinh học cách đa ra lời đề nghị, lời mời qua các cấu trúc: + Should/ + Why don't you...? / + Let's ... - Luyện kỹ năng nghe hội thoại, luyện tập theo cặp, nhìn tranh nêu hoạt động. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : To invite (v) To practice (v) To come along - Together 2. Grammar : - Let’s go to the cafeteria - Why don’t you come along ? III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Have Ss go to the board and write down Teacher – whole Warm up.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span> 5’. - Demonstrate the group which miss the games  Lead the new lesson Presentation - Ask Ss some questions such as: What do you often do after school ? - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the question : What are they doing ? - Have Ss listen to the tape - Explain some new words and structures + To invite (v) : mêi + To practice (v) : luyÖn tËp + To come along : ®i cïng + Together : cïng nhau + Let’s /go to the cafeteria and get / a cold drink / invite him + Why don’t you / come along ? / play soccer ? - Ask Ss to make sentences using the structures: - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape Practice again - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialougue - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Answer : - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers then ask Ss to write down a. She’s doing her math home work b. They are going to get a cold drink in the caferia c. He’s in the music room d. He’slearning to phay the guitar e. He usually meets his friends f. She likes playing volleyball - Have Ss play a game : Production Noughts and crosses Lan: Do home work These boys: Computer games Minh: Watch T.V You: Listen to music Mai and Hoa: Talk The girls: Skip rope Nam: Play marbles Long&Minh: Chat Ba: Play the guitar Model: S1 : What is Lan doing ? S2 : She is doing her homework Consolidation Repeat the main content of the lesson 2’ Write the answers in part A1 in the notebook. Homework Make 5 questions with each structure 3’ Do exercise 1 at page 33 in workbook. class Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual. Pair Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span> Prepare A2 V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 18/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 6: Period: 32. After school Lesson 2: A. What do you do A2. I/ Objects. - Giúp học sinh nắm đợc các từ chỉ hoạt động thể thao, vui chơi, giải trí sau giờ học. - Học sinh nhìn tranh nêu đợc các hoạt động. - Luyện hỏi đáp với câu hỏi: What do you usually . . .? How often do you . . . ? II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : Revise adverbs of frequency: Always,usually,sometimes,often,never 2. Grammar : Review:the present simple tense III/ Teaching aids. Make a plan, Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Greetings Teacher – Warm up _Have Ss review the old lesson by playing a game whole class 5’ called slap the board _Read these words in Vietnamese +Swim +Read book +Watch T.V +Play computer games +Play soccer +Go to the movie _give the result and remark Presentation Ask SS to look at the pictures in the books carefully _Have Ss call the names of the pictures Pair 10’ _Call on someSs to give the answers _Correct and give the corect answers: 1/Reading/studying in the library Teacher – 2/Swimming in the pool whole class 3/Playing computer games 4/Going to a movie 5/Playing soccer 6/Watching T.V _Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about Whole class the pictures _Make model What are these students doing? Individual They are reading in the library _Call on some pairs to practice in front of the cllass b/Ask Ss the questions Practice What do you usually do after school? Pair 15’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span> - Have Ss play a game: Noughts and crosses Always :Go swimming Often: Play computer games Teacher – Never: Go to the library whole class Usually: Play soccer Sometimes: play computer games Often: Go to a movie Usually: Watch T.V Pair Often: Play tennis Sometimes: Do homework - Ask Ss to use adverbs in the box to write a sentences Teacher – for each day of the week whole class Have Ss Work in pairs asking and answering Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class Induividual Remark and correct the mistakes Now ask and answer question,using “How often……?” Whole class Make example with a student PairTeacher – How often do you go to the library? whole class Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering,using the pictures in the book Induividual Call on some pairs to pratce in front of the class Correct the mistake if have Whole class Language focus Pair Production _Give the information in the table and ask Ss to look 10’ at the table then matching : Activities Frequency Teacher – Go cafeteria never whole class Ride bicycle sometimes Practice guitar often Induividual Do home work usually Play computer games always _Call on some Ss to give the result Whole class _Correct the mistakes _Ask Ss to write about Ba, using the information Model : _Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time _Call on 2 students to go to the board and wirte down _Remark and give marks Consolidation Repeat the main content of the lesson 2’ _Write a sentence for each day of the week , using the Homework advends of frequency 3’ _Do exercise 2+3 at page 34 in work book _Prepare part 3,4,5_ V.Ajustment: ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... .. Ngµy so¹n: 18/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 5: Period: 33. Work and play Lesson 3: A3,4. I/ Objects. - Học sinh tiếp tục nói về các loại hoạt động ngoài giờ học, mở rộng lợng từ vựng sang các hoạt động khác nh (acting, theater, Stamp, collecting)..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span> - Nâng cao kỹ năng đọc, hiểu, trả lời câu hỏi, luyện kỹ năng nghe, hiểu, ghép thông tin. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : Sport / A comie / A president / An anmversary celebration / Collect / collector/collection 2. Grammar : Review : The present continuous tense / the present simple tense. III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan., Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Have Ss play a game Teacher – Warm up Guessing game whole class 5’ Ask Ss to write pentences about the activity which they play after school Ex : I usually play soccer after school Ask one student to go to the board and their friends guess. Activity 1 Pre-reading1. Newwords Pair School anniversary celebration:lÔ kû niÖm ngµy thµnh lËp 25’ trêng Orchesttra: dµn nh¹c giao hëng Teacher – Stamp collector's club: c©u l¹c bé nh÷ng ngêi su t¹p tem whole class Rehearse: diÔn kÞch Sporty: yªu thÝch thÓ thao Lie: n»m - Read first and ask ss to repeat * Check vocabulary: Slap the board B. While-reading Whole class - Open the tape first. Ask ss to listen to the tape - Open the tape twice or three times. Ask ss to listen and answer questions Individual - Call some ss to read the passage before class - Correct mistakes if have Pair - Ask ss to practice in pairs to answer questions - Call some pairs of ss to answer before class - remark and give feedback Teacher – a) Her theater group is rehearsing a play for the school whole class anniversary celebration b.He gets American stamps from Liz, his American friend c) The stamp collector's club meets on Wednesday afternoon Whole class d) Nam never plays games C. Post-reading - What does Nga like doing after school hours? Individual - What do Ba and his friends often do on Wednesday afternoon? -What does Nam often do after school hours? A. Pre-listening Activity 2 You will listen to a group of friends talk about their after- Pair 10’ school activities. You listen and do exercise in part 4 B. While-listening - Open the tape twice or three times Teacher – - match each name to an activity whole class - Compare results with a partner - Call some ss to read the results before class - Remark and give feedback Pair a) Mai - go to school cafeteria b. Nam - rehearse a play c) Ba - go to the circus d) Lan - watch movie e) Kien - tidy the classroom Teacher –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span> C. Post-listening - Ask ss to practice in groups. make up similar dialogues which you have just listened A. Pre-listening You will listen to a group of friends talk about their afterschool activities. You listen and do exercise in part4 B. While-listening - Open the tape twice or three times - match each name to an activity - Compare results with a partner - Call some ss to read the results before class - Remark and give feedback a) Mai - go to school cafeteria b) Nam - rehearse a play c) Ba - go to the circus d) Lan - watch movie e) Kien - tidy the classroom C. Post-listening - Ask ss to practice in groups. make up similar dialogues which you have just listened Consolidation Repeat the activities after school hours _Ask Ss to write a paraguaph about after school activities, 2’ using matching Homework Learn by heart new words by writing 3 times for each _Do exercise 4 at page 35 in work book 3’ V.Adjustment:. whole class. Whole class Individual. Ngµy so¹n: 25/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 6: Period: 34. After school Lesson 4: B. Let’s go B1. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh tiếp tục nắm vững các cấu trúc đề nghị, gợi ý, đa ra một lời mời cùng với cách nhËn lêi vµ tõ chèi lêi mêi qua c¸c cÊu tróc. + What about + V-ing? + Let's + V. + Why don't you...? - Đồng thời học sinh cũng đợc ôn lại cách dùng một số động từ đặc biệt nh can, could. - LuyÖn kü n¨ng nghe + thùc hµnh nãi thµnh th¹o theo nhãm 4 ngêi th¶o luËn vÒ mét sè vÊn đề cụ thể. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : Assigament (n) Fun (adj) 2/ Structure : _Let’s + V _What about + Ving ? _Why don’t / we / you _Responses : Yes, let’s Good idea / ok Sorry, I can’t III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan, Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Greetings Teacher – whole Warm up Ask Ss some questions about themselves class 5’ What do you usually do after the school ? + Do you like playing soccer ? + Do you usuallt / go to the movie ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span> / play games ? + How often do you go to the movie ? …. Remark Presentation Introduce the situation of the dialogue : Ba , Nam , Lan and Hoa are discussing about / What they 10’ should do to relax / How they should relax Have Ss look at the picture and guess what activities they are talking Call on some Ss to give their predictions Play the tape for Ss (2 times ) _Call on one student to give the answer _Introduce some new words and structures: + Assignment (n) = home work + Fun (adj) + Suggestions : + Let’s go to my house go to Lan’s house + Why don’t you relax ? + What about going to the movie ? What about + V-ing + .........? Let's + V-inf Why don't you + V-inf ........? * Answers Agree: Great/ oh. I'd love to Disagree: I am sorry Have Ss practice the dialogue in front of the class Practice Call on some groups to practice in front of the 15’ class Ask ss to answer questions following the content of the dialogue - Ask ss to compare the result with a partner - Call some ss to read aloud before class - Remark and give feedback a) Nam wants to go to the movies b) Lan doesn't want to go to the movies because there aren't any movies at the moment c) Lan wants to listen to some music at her house d) Hoa doesn't want to go to Lan's house because she has no many assignments e) It's Saturday Have Ss practice , using given words : Production 1/ Let’s / listen / music 10’ 2/ What / Watch / movie 3/ Why / join us 4/ What / go / cafeteria 5/ Why / study / library Make model : S1 : Let’s listen to some music S2 : Yes , let’s good idea Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class Correct the mistakes if necessary Consolidation Repeat the main content of the lesson What about + V-ing + .........? 2’ Let's + V-inf Why don't you + V-inf ........? Make & sentences for each structures Homework. Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual. Pair Teacher – whole class. Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span> 3’. _Do exercise 1 at page 35 in work book _Prepare B2. V.Adjustment:. Ngµy so¹n: 26/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 6: Period: 35. After school Lesson 5: B. Let’s go B2. I/ Objectives. - Giúp học sinh nắm đợc một số tổ chức dành cho học sinh ở Việt Nam và ở Mỹ. - Luyện kỹ năng đọc hiểu. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : Teenager,Musical instrument,Model,Organization,Scout,Guide,Coin 2/ Structure: III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Teacher – whole Warm up class 5’ Presentation 10’. Practice 15’. Ask Ss to list the activities that teenagess like to do in their free time Explain some new words to Ss + Teenager (n) : thiếu niên + Musical mstrument (n) : Nhạc cụ + Model (n) : mẫu + Scout (n) : Hướng đạo sinh + Guide (n) : + Coin (n) : Tiền xu + Organization (n) : Tổ chức Checking technique Rub out and remember Ask Ss to predict what American (students) teenagers like to di in their free time Call on some students to give then predictions Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and call the names of these activities Ask Ss to look at the book and read the text in silent Have Ss give the names of activities Ask them to compare with their predictions Remark and call some students to read the text aloud Give some comprehension questions: / Which of the activities in the best of American teenagers do you think are aloo popolar among Vnamese teenagers ? 2/ Are there many kinds of entertainment for teenagers in VN ? What are they ? 3/ What organizations are there for teenagers in VN?. Pair Teacher class. – whole. Whole class Individual. Pair Teacher class. – whole. Teacher class. – whole. Whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span> Call on some Ss to give the answers Correct the mistakes Production 10’. Practice _Ask Ss to discuss in groups of four _Have Ss ask their friends with out they like doing in their free time, then make a list of their groups favorite leisure activity in front of the class _Call on some groups to read about their group’s favorite leisure activities aloud _Remark then give the most popular activity of the students in class _Compare with the activities of American teenagers Consolidation Repeat the top ten most popular activities of American teenagers 2’ Homework 3’. Individual Teacher class. – whole. Whole class Individual. Learn by heart 10 most popular activities _Do exercise 2 at page 35 in work book _Prepare part 3,4. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 27/10/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /10/2010. Unit 6: Period: 36. After school Lesson 6: B. Let’s go B3,4. I/ Objectives. - Häc sinh tiÕp tôc n¾m v÷ng c¸ch thùc hiÖn mét lêi mêi, nhËn vµ tõ chèi lêi mêi qua c¸c cÊu tróc: - Would you like . . . ? + Yes, i'd love to/ + It's my pleasure /+ You are welcome - Qua bài đọc HS cũng đợc học một số công việc tình nguyện mà các bạn học sinh Mỹ thờng làm. - RÌn kü n¨ng luyÖn theo cÆp. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary :.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span> Wedding (n) / Elderly people / Community service/ Volumteer (n) /Neighborhood/ clean_up / Canpaigns 2/ Structure: Would you like to…?Why don’t you…?What about….?  Yes, I’d love to/ That would be great fun / I ‘d love to but I’m sorry I can’t III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan, Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities _Greetings Teacher Warm up _Ask Ss some questions about what they like doing in whole class 5’ their free time _Call on some one student to go to the board and write down the activities of American teenagers bike doing in their free time _Remark and give mark Activitie one A. Presentation 1. Newwords Pair 15’ - Use pictures to introduce newwords Thanks for doing sb A wedding Teacher Thanks anyway whole class It's my pleasure You're welcome B. Practice - Open the tape twice or three times. Ask ss to listen and repeat Whole class - ask ss to practice in pairs - Call some pairs of students to practice in pairs before class Individual - Make questions and ask ss to answer Do you usually use invitation? In which occation do you use these invitations? Teacher How do you accept or refuse the invitation? whole class - Remark and give feedback - Invitations:  Would you like + to + V-inf+...? Agree:Yes, I'd love to / That would be great fun Disagree: I'd love to but I'm sorry I can't Whole class - Respond to thanks:  You' welcome / It's my pleasure - Ask ss to practice in pairs the dialogue Individual C. Production - Ask ss to build up similar dialogues - Ask ss to practice in pairs Activitie two A. Pre-reading 1. Newwords Pair 15’ Elderly people: Community service: Volunteer: Teacher Neighborhood clean-up campaigns: whole class Candy stripers To be comcerned about: - Read first. Ask ss to listen and repeat - Call some ss to read again Teacher - Remark and correct mistakes if have whole class * Check vocabulary: Rub out and remember B. While-reading - Open the tape. Then ask ss to listen and repeat - Call ss to read aloud before class. –. –. –. –. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span> - Correct mistakes if have - Ask ss to answer questions a) What do American teenagers do to help community? b) What are they called? c) What are others conerned about? C. Post-reading - Ask the whole class to discuss a) How do some teenagers help the community? b) How do Vietnamese teenagers help the community? Call on some groups to give the answers in front of the Production class 5’ Correct the mistakes Consolidation Repeat the structures of invitation and activities teenagers can help the commounty 2’ Learn by heart new words & remember by making Homework sentences 3’ Learn by heart 10 most popular activities V.Adjustment:. Whole class Individual. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Ngµy so¹n: 5/11/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 9 /10/2010 period: 37. Language focus 2. I/ Objectives. - ¤n l¹i kiÕn thøc ng÷ ph¸p, tõ vùng tõ bµi 3 - 6. - Áp dông kiÕn thøc ng÷ ph¸p vµo lµm c¸c d¹ng bµi tËp. - RÌn luyÖn kü n¨ng tr×nh bµy c¸c d¹ng bµi tËp. - H×nh thµnh ý thøc lµm bµi KT. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : 2/ Structure: Review : The present continuons tense Time and subject vocabulary This, that , these , those Adverbs of frequency Making suggestions III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Greetings Teacher – whole Warm up _Have Ss play a game class 5’ Mini game + Brainstorm the activities at racess + Call on some of the students to present in front of the class + Ask Ss to make sentences a loud activities in the present continuous tense Presentation 10’. 1. Present simple tense - Ask ss to repeat how to use and form and then ask Pair ss to do exercise a) Use: is used to express an action which is Teacher happening at the same time speaking. – whole.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span> b) Form:  S + be + V-inf......  S + be + not + V-inf......  Be +S + V-inf......? Yes, S + be No, S + be + not 2. This and That, These and Those - Ajective demonstratve + Ns/es/N - Pronoun demonstrative + be + 3. Time - Ask ss to repeat how to ask and answer about the time - Write on the board What time is it? It's + hour + o'clock It's + minutes + past/to + hour It's + a quarter + past/to + minutes It's + half + past + hour 4. Vocabulary a) Physical education b) Math c) English d) Chemist e) Geography f) History 5. Adverbs of frequency - Ask ss to give adverbs of frequency - Ask ss to repeat the position of adverbs + S + be + adv + ........ + S + adv + Vs/es - Ask ss to read exercises 6. Making suggestions Let's + V-inf + .... Would you like + V-inf+ .......? Should we + V-inf + .......? Practice 15’. Exercise one: 1. is doing 2. Is writing 3. Is reading 4. Is cooking 5. Are playing 6. Is kicking 7. Is running Exercisetwo: a) This room is very dirty Sorry Mom b) Put this bag away That isn't my bag, Mom. This is my bag c) Put those dirtysocksin the washing basket These socks? d) Throw away those comics but I like these comics Exercise three: - Copy in the exercise book b) It starts at a quarter past seven c) half past ten d) six fory-five Exercise four: a) Ba seldom rides a bike to school. class. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher class. – whole. Whole class Individual Whole class Individual Pair Teacher class. – whole. Pair Teacher class. – whole. Pair Teacher class. – whole. Whole class Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span> Production 10’. b) Ba always practices the guitar after school c) Ba usually does his homework in the evening d) Ba sometimes plays computer games Exercise three: Agree: OK/ Yes, I'd love to Disagree: I'm sorry. I can't I'm sorry. I'm busy. Teacher class. Have Ss do exercise : I/ Complete the sentences with the suitable words or phrases 1/ ___don’t you come to my house ? Ok. Let’s go (Why/let’s/what ) 2/ What about __Halong Bay ? (tovisit / visit / visitting ) 3/ Would you like __badminton ? (play / to play / playing ) 4/ Children should __to bed early (go/ to go / going ) 5/ That’s a good__? Let’s go to the beach (Thinking/ answer / idea ) II/ Do as directed in the brackets 1. He goes to the library three times a week < make questions> 2. They will visit their grand parents to night (change into negative form) 3. What do you usually do after school ? (answer the questions ? 4. We play soccer (make a suggestion ) _Corerct the mistakes. Pair. – whole. Whole class Individual. Teacher class. – whole. Whole class Individual. Consolidation Repeat the top ten most popular activities of American teenagers 2’ Homework 3’. Learn by heart 10 most popular activities _Do exercise 2 at page 35 in work book _Prepare part 3,4. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................... Ngµy so¹n: 7/11/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 13/11/2010. kiÓm tra 45 phót I/ Objectives. - Gióp häc sinh cñng cè vµ kh¾c s©u kiÕn thøc c¸c bµi häc tõ Unit 4 -> Unit 6. - Giúp học sinh nắm đợc mức độ nhận thức của học sinh. Tìm ra phơng pháp giảng dạy phï hîp. - RÌn luyÖn kü n¨ng lµm bµi kiÓm tra, bµi thi. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: Review all the vocabulary. 2, Structures: period: 38.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span> 2.1.present simple tense  S + to be + .........  S + V(s/es) .......... 2.2. Present simple tense:  S + is/are/am + Ving .......  S + is/are/am + not + Ving .......  is/are/am +S + V-ing .........?  Yes, S + is/are /am  No, S + isn’t/ aren’t. 2.3. Requests.  What about + V(ing)?  How a bout + V(ing)?  Let’s + V(inf)?  Why don’t we + V(inf)? III/ Teaching aids. GV: Ra đề phù hợp với các đối tợng HS, Phôtô đề ; Ra đáp án, biểu điểm. HS: ¤n l¹i tõ vùng, ng÷ ph¸p. IV. Ma trËn Chủ đề NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Tæng TNKQ TL TL TL 5 5 I. Reading 2 2 4 Phonetic 1 25 6 II. Language Vocabulary 8 focus 2 5 8 Grammar 1 2 8. III. Writing Tæng. 13. 3. 13. 3. 12. 2 4. 8. 2. 38. 10 * Lu ý: - Ch÷ sè phÝa bªn tr¸i mçi « lµ sè lîng c©u hái, ch÷ sè ë gãc ph¶i phÝa díi lµ tæng sè điểm cho các câu ở ô đó V. Néi dung(Questions) Questions I. Which one is different? 1. A. relax B.repair C. event D. present 2. A. event B. experiment C. bell D. novel 3. A. portable B. comic C. score D. orchestra 4. A. volunteer B. fun C. sunny D. under II. Choose the best answer 1. Her group is ..........a play for the school anniversary celebrations A. playing B. rehearsing C. doing D. rehearse 2. We study past and present events in Viet Nam and around the world in ........ A. Physics B. History C. Music D. Electronics 3. In language class, students study................................................................................ A. physics B. English C. math D. history 4. He likes ........ books in the library A. read B. reads C. to read D. reading 5. My classes ........... at 11 o’clock A. finishing B. finishes C. finish D. to finish 6. Hoa will ...... her parents next summer vacation A. go and see B. goes and see C. goes and sees D. go and sees 7. Lan usually ..... speaking English everymorning.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span> A. practice B. practices C. to practice D. practicing 8. Why don’t we ...........volleyball ? A.play B. playing C.to play D. will play III. Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets 1. Where (be) your sisters?- They (read) in the library./................................................. 2. I (do) my math homework at the moment./..................................................................... 3. Children shouldn’t (stay) up late./.................................................................................. 4. He enjoys (collect) stamps and coins./........................................................................... 5. Next year, my sister (be) a teacher./.............................................................................. 6. Would you like (have) breakfast?./.............................................................................. 7. I don’t feel like working. What about (go) to the movies?./............................................. IV. Fill in the blanks a suitable preposition 1. I am good ....................fixing household appliances 2. We are concerned .......................the environment 3. Schools in Vietnam are different ......................those in the USA 4. Is your plane ................7 o’clock .........................the evening? V. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meanings 1. No one in the class is as tall as Nga Nga....................................................................................................................................... 2. Nam often sings very well Nam is good......................................................................................................................... 3. Let’s go to the zoo and have some fun Why don’t we .................................................................................................? 4. Her favorite subjects are English and History She...................................................................................................................................... VI. Rearrange the words to make sentences 1. Saturday/ Physical Education/ they/ on/ have ............................................................................................................................................. 2. always/ he/ a / asks/ of/ in / questions/ class/ lot. .............................................................................................................................................. 3. moment/ I / study/ the / to/ hard/ at/ have .............................................................................................................................................. 4. today/ ill/ because/ Ba/ staying/ is/ is/ home/ he/ at. .............................................................................................................................................. VII. Read the following passage, then answer the questions The Vietnamese students take part in different after- school activities. Some students play sports. They often play soccer, table tennis or babminton. Sometimes they go swimming in the swimming pools. Some students like music, drama and movies. They often practice playing musical instruments in the school music room. They join in the school theater group and usually rehearse plays. Some are members of the stamp collector’s club. They often get together and talk about their stamps. A few students stay at home and play video games or computer games. Most of them enjoy their activities after school hours. 1. Which sports do some students often play? ............................................................................................................................................. 2. How often do they swimming? ............................................................................................................................................. 3. Where do some students often practice playing musical instruments? .............................................................................................................................................. 4. How often do they rehearse plays? .............................................................................................................................................. 5. Do Vietnamese students enjoy their activities? ............................................................................................................................................. VI. Keys Questions I. Which one is different? 1. D 2. D 3. B 4. A.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span> II. Choose the best answer 1. B 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. C III. Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets 1. are/ are reading 2. am doing 3. stay 4. collecting 5. will be 6. to have 7. going 1. at 2. about 3. from 4. at/ in IV. Fill in the blanks a suitable preposition 1. at 2. about 3. from 4. at/ in. 6. A. 7. B. 8. A. V. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meanings 1. is the tallest in the class 2. at singing 3. go to the zoo and have some fun 4.is interested in English and History VI. Rearrange the words to make sentences 1. They have physcal education on Saturday 2. He always asks a lot of questions in class 3. I have to study hard at the moment 4. Ba is staying at home today because he is ill VII. Read the following passage, then answer the questions 1. They often play soccer, table tennis or babminton 2. .Sometimes they go swimming 3. They often practice playing musical instruments in the school music room 4. They usually rehearse plays 5. Yes, they do V.Adjustment:. Ngµy so¹n: 13/11/2010 Ngµy d¹y: 15/11/2010 Period: 39 The second English test correction Time: 45 minutes Period: 38. I/ Objectives. - Gióp häc sinh cñng cè l¹i kiÕn thøc ng÷ ph¸p, tõ vùng vÒ c¸c chñ ®iÓm (Work and play, After school). - RÌn luyÖn kü n¨ng lµm bµi kiÓm tra. - Giáo viên nắm đợc mức độ nhận thức của học sinh. Tìm và áp dụng phơng pháp giảng d¹y phï hîp h¬n. II/ Language contents. 1, Vocabulary: Review all the vocabulary. 2, Structures: present simple tense S + to be + ......... S + V(s/es) .......... Present simple tense: S + is/are/am + Ving ........

<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span> S + is/are/am + not + Ving ....... is/are/am +S + V-ing .........? Yes, S + is/are /am No, S + isn’t/ aren’t. Requests. What about + V(ing)? How a bout + V(ing)? Let’s + V(inf)? Why don’t we + V(inf)? III/ Teaching aids. GV: Ra đề phù hợp với các đối tợng HS, Phôtô đề ; Ra đáp án, biểu điểm. HS: ¤n l¹i tõ vùng, ng÷ ph¸p. IV/ Teaching procedures IV/ Procedures (tiÕn tr×nh) Stage Content Warm up What is the weather like today? 2’ What are you doing? Repeat the 1, Vocabulary: main Review all the vocabulary. knowledge 2, Structures: 10’ present simple tense S + to be + ......... S + V(s/es) .......... Present simple tense: S + is/are/am + Ving ....... S + is/are/am + not + Ving ....... is/are/am +S + V-ing .........? Yes, S + is/are /am No, S + isn’t/ aren’t. Compliments: What a/an + adj + noun! occupations , adjectives, prepositions. Requests. What about + V(ing)? How a bout + V(ing)? Let’s + V(inf)? Why don’t we + V(inf)? Correct the Questions test I. Which one is different? 30’ 1. D 2. D 3. B 4. A II. Choose the best answer 1. B 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. C 6. A 7. B 8. A III. Put the correct form of the verbs in brackets 1. are/ are reading 2. am doing 3. stay 4. collecting 5. will be 6. to have 7. going 1. at 2. about 3. from 4. at/ in IV. Fill in the blanks a suitable preposition 1. at 2. about 3. from 4. at/ in V. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meanings 1. is the tallest in the class 2. at singing 3. go to the zoo and have some fun. Activity T- Whole class. T- whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span> Evaluate student’s test 2’. 4.is interested in English and History VI. Rearrange the words to make sentences 1. They have physcal education on Saturday 2. He always asks a lot of questions in class 3. I have to study hard at the moment 4. Ba is staying at home today because he is ill VII. Read the following passage, then answer the questions 1. They often play soccer, table tennis or babminton 2. .Sometimes they go swimming 3. They often practice playing musical instruments in the school music room 4. They usually rehearse plays 5. Yes, they do Líp Giái Kh¸ Trung YÕu KÐm b×nh 7A 7B. Homework - Ask ss to prepare new lesson 1’ V/ Adjustment:. Ngµy so¹n: 12/11/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /11/2010. Unit 7: The word of world period: 40 Lesson 1: A. A student's work. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh nắm đợc nội dung bài hội thoại giữa bạn Hoa và bác của bạn trao đổi về thời gian các môn học và dự định của bạn Hoa sẽ làm trong dịp nghỉ hè là sẽ trở về Huế thăm bố mÑ vµ gióp bè mÑ lµm viÖc. - Từ đó giúp học sinh nói về các hoạt động/ công việc học tập và các ngày nghỉ ở Mỹ vµ ViÖt Nam. II/ Language contents. 1/ Vocabulary :Hour (n), To last (v), Hard,Late later, Early  Earlier, Few  Fewer,many  more 2/ Grammar Review the present tense Structure : that takes about 2 hours each day III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Ask ss some questions Teacher – whole Warm up class 5’  What time do the classes start?  What time do they finish? For how many hours a day do you do your homework? Presentation - You will hear a conversation between Hoa and her uncle about school work Pair 10’ - First, open the tape and ask ss to listen - Introduce ss some newwords To be late for sth: Teacher – whole That takes two hours to do sth: class Summer vacation = summer holiday:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span> Practice 15’. - Second, open the tape. Ask ss to listen and practice in pairs - Call some pairs of students to practice in front of class Introduce the lesson “ You wil hear a cowersation between Hoa and her uncle about school work “ _Explin some new words : + An hour (n) + To last (v) + Hard + Late  Later + Early  earlier + Few  fewer + Many  more - Have Ss play a game Rub put and remember - Have Ss predict the answers ,using questions a,b,c,d a/ What time do Hoa’s classes start and finish b/ Do your classes start earlier or later ? c/ How many hours a day does Hoa do her homework ? d/ Do you work fewer or more hours than Hoa ? - Ask Ss to work in groups - Call on some representatwes to give their predictions - Presentation dialogue - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape - Ask them to read the dialogue a gain and check their preditions - Remark - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on some pairs to role phay the dialogue in front of the class - Correct the pronunciation - Questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions in front of the class - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a/ Her classes start at 7 o’clock b/ They finish at a quarter past elcrion c/ She does her home work 2 hours a day d/ She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacation Explain the structure That takes about 2 hours each day = It takes Hoa about 2 hours to do her home work each day  It takes Sb to make examples _Ask Ss to make examples _Give word cue to drikl + Hoa’s classes : 7:00 Our classes : 6:45 + The film : 9:30 + The play : 10 :00 + Hoa (work ) : 2 hours Miss Mai : 4 hours Make example. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual Whole class Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span> S1 : Hoa’s classes start later than ourclasses S2 : Our classes start earlier than Hoa’s classes _Have Ss work in pairs _Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class _Correct the mistakes Production 10’. _Ask Ss to make sentences comparing their work with Hoa’s work using earber/later/fewer/more _Have Ss exchange the results with their partners _Call on some students to read then sentences aloud _Remark Consolidation - Ask ss to summarize story between Hoa and Hoa's uncle 2’ Homework 3’ V.Ajustment:. Teacher – whole class Individual Pair. Learn by heart new words 48 in work book. Ngµy so¹n: 18/11/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /11/2010. Unit 7: The word of world period: 41 Lesson 2: A. A student's work a2,3. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh nắm đợc nội dung lá th của Tim viết cho Hoa kể cho Hoa nghe về những điều mà học sinh nớc Mỹ thờng hay làm trong kỳ nghỉ hè. Từ đó so sánh đợc những hoạt động của học sinh Việt Nam và hoạt động của học sinh nớc Mỹ trong kỳ nghỉ hè. II/ Language contents. 1/ Vocabulary _To celebrate (v) _Easter (n) _Thanks giving _New year ‘s Eve _Independence Day _Chistmas 2/ Grammar : _Review _The present simple tense _Comparetive with later/earlier/fewer/more III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Greetings Teacher – Warm up _Have Ss play a game : whole class 5’ Pelmanism Early/ late/ longer/ few/ long / earlier / later / fewer _Device the class into 2 groups _Ask them to play game _Remark Presentation 10’. new structures A few + N(n). Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span> S1 + V + fewer/ more + N(s) + than + S2 Ex: I have fewer friends than he does He has more friends than I do 2. Read them answer the questions _Introduce the situation of the lesson _Present some new words: + To celebrate (v) : tổ chức, kỉ niệm + Easter : + Thanks giving : + New year’s Eve : + Independence Day : + Chistmas _Correct their pronunciation _Checking technique _Have Ss play again What and Where _Ask Ss to do exercise T or F before reading the letter 1/ Vnamese students have fewer vacation than American students 2/ American students have the longest vacation in winter 3/ They don’t have a Tet holiday 4/ their most important vacation is New year’s day 5/ They usually spend their time with their families on Thanks giving and Chirstmas Day _Call on some groups to give their predictions _Ask Ss to look at the book and read the letter _Ask them to check their predictions _Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class _Correct and give the correct answers 1–T 2–F3-T 4–F 5–T _Call on 2  3 students to read the letter aloud _Questions : _Have Ss work in pairs _Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class _Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a/ Summer vacation in the longest in America b/ During his vacation, Tim spends time with his family c/ Vnamese students have fewer vacations than american students _Have Ss fill in the grids Vacations Vn students American students Longest vacation Tet holiday Thanks giving Chistmas Independence Day Easter New year’s / Eve Day In the summer September 2nd Lunar December 30th In the summer July 4th. Teacher whole class. –. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher whole class. –. Whole class Individual Whole class Individual Pair Teacher whole class. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span> January 1st Practice 15’. Production 10’. <3> Listen. Write the name _Ask Ss to look at the pictures carefully _Ask Ss to predict the name of each picture _Play the tape for Ss ( 2times) _Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class _Correct and give the correct answers a/ Thanhs giving b/ Independence Day c/ New year’s Eve d/ Chistmas Ask ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer about vacations in Vietnam. Pair Teacher whole class. –. Whole class Individual Individual Pair. Consolidation - Reapeat vacations in America and in Vietnam - Repeat structures of comparison 2’ Homework 3’ V.Ajustment:. Learn by heart new words 48 in work book. Ngµy so¹n: 19/11/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /11/2010. Unit 7: The word of world period: 42 Lesson 3: A. A student's work (, A4). I/ Objectives. - Học sinh tiếp tục học về các ngày lễ lớn ở Mỹ đồng thời học sinh đợc học sâu hơn về công việc của một học sinh qua bài đọc về Hoa - một học sinh Việt Nam điển hình. - LuyÖn ph¸t triÓn kü n¨ng nghe hiÓu, n¾m th«ng tin chÝnh qua d¹ng bµi nghe - ghÐp tranh, bên cạnh đó HS nâng cao kỹ năng đọc hiểu, mở rộng vốn từ vựng về các công việc cña mét häc sinh. II/ Language contents. 1/ Vocabulary :To review, Typical,Keen, Lazy,Period,To take a look 2/ Grammar Review : - The present simple tense - Comparaties with few/many III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings Teacher – Warm up - Have Ss play a game whole class 5’ Net work.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span> American public holidays. Presentation 10’. Practice 15’. Production 10’. - Devide the class into 2 groups - Call on 2 dtudents represented for their groups to go to the board and write down - Remark 2/ Pre_reading _Ask Ss some questions alout them selves + What do you do every day ? + How many hours a day do you study ? + Do you have to do a lot of home work ? + (Have) Introduce the situation of the lesson _Explain some new words + period + To review + Typical + Keen + Lazy + To take a look + Definitely - Have Ss play a game - Remark - Ask Ss to prediet the information about Hoa 1/ Hoa goes to school __day a week 2/ She has__periods aday 3/ She works __hours a week 4/ She has about__ hours of home work every week 5/ Before test , she works __hours a week - Have Ss work in groups - Call on some representativies to give the predictions - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape - Ask them to read the text in silent and check their prediction - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers 1/ 6 days 2/ 5 period 3/ 20 hours 4/ 12 hours 5/ 45 hours - Call on 3 4 students to read the text aloud - Correct their pronunciation - Questions - Ask Ss to read the text again & find ort the answers - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1/ Why do some people think that students have an easy life ? 2/ Lucky number 3/ Does Hoa have to work at home ? 4/ Does Hoa work fewer hours than most workers ? 5/ How many hours a week do you work ? 6/ Lucky number 7/ How many hours a week does she work before tests ? 8/ How many work fewer or more than Hoa? - Remark Ask Ss some questions : + What do you think of a students life ?. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher whole class. –. Whole class Individual Whole class Individual Pair Pair Teacher whole class Whole class Individual. Individual Pair. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span> + Do you think students are lazy ? - Remark Consolidation Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each - Write the answer in the notebooks 2’ - Do exercise 2,3 at page 43,44 in work book - Prepare part B1 Learn by heart new words 48 in work book Homework 3’ V.Ajustment: Ngµy so¹n: 21/11/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /11/2010. Unit 7: The word of world period: 43 Lesson 4: B Worker (B1). I/ Objectives. - Giúp học sinh nắm đợc nội dung lá th của Tim gửi cho Hoa, kể cho Hoa nghe về gia d×nh cña b¹n Êy. Qua l¸ th häc sinh biÕt c¸ch miªu t¶ nh÷ng c«ng viÖc cô thÓ vÒ mét sè nghÒ nh (house, wife, mechanic, farmer) qua đó học sinh biết cách so sánh và đối chiếu các nghề kh¸c nhau, t×m ra sù gièng, kh¸c nhau vÒ gi¸ trÞ, tÇm quan träng cña nghÒ nghiÖp. - Gi¸o dôc häc sinh biÕt yªu nghÒ nghiÖp, ý thøc vÒ nghÒ nghiÖp trong t¬ng lai. - Luyện kỹ năng đọc, hiểu. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - To take care of ( v) -Mechanic ( n ) - Machine ( n ) - To work part- time - Shift ( n) - To play golf - Homeless ( adj ) 2. Grammar : Review : the present simple tense III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Teacher – Warm up whole class 5’ Presentation 10’.  - Pre – reading : -Introduce the situation of the lesson -Explain some new words or phrases : + To take care of ( v ) = to look after + To work part – time +Mechanic ( n ) + Machine ( n ) + Shift ( n ) + Homeless ( adj )  Checking technique : Play a game : What and where  Ordering the main ideas : - Ask Ss to predict the order of the main ideas a. Mr Jones’s work . b. Tim’s introduction of his family. c. Mr Jones’s vacation time . d. Mrs. Jones’s work .. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher whole class. Whole class. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span> - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to give their predictions in. front of the class. - You will read a letter which Hoa writes to his family. You scan it and answer these questions  How many people does Tim's family have?  Who does Tim write about in the letter? - Open the tape and ask ss to listen to the tape - Call some ss to read the letter aloud before class - Ask ss to answer questions - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some ss to read the results before class - Remark and give correct answers a) Mrs John works at home. But three mornings a week. She works part-time at a local supermarket b) She cooks lunch for homeless people once a week c) Mr John is a mechanic. He repairs machines in a factory d) He works about 40 hours a week e) The John family always goes to Florida on vacation. They have a great time there Ask Ss to base on Tim’s letter to write a letter with Production the information about their own family. 10’ -Ask Ss to exchange their letters with their partners - Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary . -Ask Ss to repeat the work of the Jones family . Consolidation 2’ - Remark Homework - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines 3’ with each . - Do exercise 1, 2 at page 44 , 45 in workbook. - Prepare part 2,3 V.Ajustment: Practice 15’. Ngµy so¹n: 26/11/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /11/2010. Individual Whole clasS Pair Teacher whole class. –. Whole class Individual. Individual Pair. Unit 7: The word of world period: 44 Lesson 5: B Worker (B2, B3,4). I/ Objectives. - Học sinh nắm đợc nội dung đoạn văn kể về các công việc cụ thể của ông Tuấn - một ngêi n«ng d©n. Mét c«ng viÖc cô thÓ gÇn gòi víi thùc tÕ cuéc sèng cña c¸c em häc sinh ë n«ng th«n. - Giáo dục các em biết yêu lao động, gắng sức học hành để tìm tòi nghiên cứu khoa học, giải phóng lao động chân tay cực nhọc bằng lao động máy móc. - Luyện phát triển kỹ năng đọc hiểu. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - To feed ( v ) - Main crop ( n ) - To grow ( v ) - Buffalo shed ( n ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span> -To rest ( v ) - Chicken coop ( n ) 2. Grammar : Review : comparative with fewer / less / more III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Warm up _greetings 5’ _ Ask students some questions about The Jones + How many people are there in Tim’s family? + What does Tim’s father do? + How many hours a week does Mr. Jones work? + How many public holidays does he have ? ………………. - Remark and give marks . _ Ask Ss to look at the picture answer the question : Presentation Can you guess what the man does ? 10’ What are the daily duties of a farmer ? _ Introduce the situation of the lesson . _ Explain some new words to Ss. + To feed ( v ) : + To rest ( v ) : + Main crop ( n) : + Buffalo shed ( n ) : + Chicken coop ( n ) : + Real ( adj ) : Checking technique : Rub out and remember Practice  Presentation text : 15’ _ give some questions about Mr. Tuan and ask Ss to guess the answers . + Does Mr. Tuan work more hours than Tim’s father ? + What time does he start work ? + What time does his work finish ? + How many vacations does Mr. Tuan have ? - Call some Ss to give their prediction . - Ask Ss to give the answers a. Yes, he does. b. He starts work at 6: 00 c. His work finishes at 6 pm He has no real vacations - Call some Ss to read the text aloud . - Correct the pronunciation . b. Compare : - Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan again and the letter of Tim then make note about them . - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answer A. Pre-listening Production - Ask ss to discuss in groups about the work of some 10’ jobs such as: doctor, nurse, shop assistant, factory worker following cues: working hours, amount of vacation - Call some students to speak about in front of class. Activities Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher whole class. –. Pair Teacher whole class Whole class Individual. Individual Pair. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span> B. While-listening - Now you listen and complete the table with the information about jobs, hours per week and amount of vacation - Open the tape twice or three times - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some students to read the results aloud in front of class - Give correct answers Name Job Hours Amount per of week vacation Peter Doctor 70 Four weeks Susan Nurse 50 Three weeks Jane Shop 35 One assitant week Phong Factory 48 Two worker weeks - Open the tape once more. Pause each sentence and check answers - Explain ss phrase words: to be on duty - OPen the tape twice . Ask ss to look at the books and repeat in chorus - Call some ss to read the passage again - After having the main ideas of the reading. Let's look at part 3 (page 177) and compare Tim's father's work and Hoa's father's - Ask ss to work in pairs. Complete the information - Call some ss to read answers aloud. Others remark and correct mistakes if have - Give correct answers Hours per Days off Vacation week time Mr 40 two A threeJohn week summer vacation Mr 84 One-hour or No real Tuan five times a vacation year - Ask Ss to use the information about Mr. Tuan and Consolidation Mr. Jones to write sentences , using comparative . 2’ - Example : Mr. Tuan works more hours than Mr. Jones . Or : Mr. Jones works fewer hours than Mr. Tuan. - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down . - Correct the mistakes and ask them to write in the notebooks . - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for Homework each . 3’ - Do exercise 2, 3 at page 45, 46 in workbook. - Prepare part 4,5. V.Ajustment:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span> Ngµy so¹n: 30/11/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /11/2010. Unit 8: places Period: 45 Lesson 1: A. Asking the way (A1, A2) I/ Objectives. - Học sinh đọc đợc tên các địa danh (National Bank of Viet Nam, Saint Paul Hospital, Hotel, the Central Post Office, Ha Noi sail way station, Dong Xuan Market) trong phÇn A1. - Qua t×m hiÓu néi dung 2 ®o¹n HT gi÷a Nga vµ ngêi du lÞch, Lan vµ ngêi du lÞch h/s biết cách hỏi và chỉ đờng. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : _ National bank of Vietnam _ A souvenir shop _ Saint Paul hospital _ Go straight ahead _ Hanoi railway station _ take a first street 2. Grammar : Could you tell me how to get there ? Could you show me the way to …….? III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities _ Greetings . Teacher – Warm up _ Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words whole class 5’ BKAN LOIPHATS TOHEL NSTOAIT TAMREK TOSP FEIFCO _ Call 2 students to go to the board and rearrange these words . _ Correct the mistake and give the correct answer : BANK HOSPITAL HOTEL STATION MARKET POST OFFICE Whole class Presentation * Name the places : _ Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book carefully . 10’ _ Have Ss call the names of the pictures . _ Call some Ss to give the answer in front of the class. Individual _ Correct and give the correct answer : Pair a. National bank of Vietnam b. Saint Paul hospital c. Hotel . Teacher – d. The central post office whole class e. Hanoi railway station Dong xuan market Practice  Listen and repeat . Then practice the dialogue with a Pair partner . 15’ _ Ask Ss to look at the book and answer the questions : Teacher – Who are they ? whole class Where are they ? What does the tourist want ? _ Introduce the situation : A tourist is asking the way . Whole class _ Present some new words and structures : + A souvenir shop ( n ) + Could you tell me how to get there ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span> + Could you show me the way to the supermarket? +Go straight ahead . Take the first street . + Go straight to the first street . Turn left . _Ask Ss to make sentences with the structures . S1 : Could you tell me how to get to the theater ? S2 : Go straight ahead . Turn left . It’s on your right . _ Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the question : Where does the tourist want to go ? _ Call on one student to answer the question . _ Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read after the tape . _ Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . _ Call on some pairs to read in front of the class . _ Correct the pronunciation. _ Give some places and ask Ss to practice in pairs . Rong market , Post office . _ Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . S1: Could you show me the way to Rong market ? S2: Go straight ahead . Turn left . It’s on your right correct the mistake if necessary . - Ask for and give directions Production 1. Who are they? 10’ 2. Where are they? 3. What does the tourist want? - You will hear a conversation between a foreigner and Nga. You listen and answer the question: "Where does the foreiner want to go?" - Open the tape twice or three times - Ask ss to listen to the tape and repeat - Call some pairs of students to stand up and practice before class - Introduce ss how to ask and answer the way  Could you show me the way....?  Could you tell me how to get to ....? - Hang the pictures on the board. Ask ss to play part to build a similar dialogue Consolidation Repeat ss how to ask the way and give directions  Could you show me the way....? 2’ Could you tell me how to get to ....? _ Learn by heart new structures by making 3 sentences Homework with them . 3’ _ Do exercise 1 at page 47 in workbook . _ Prepare part 3. V.Ajustment:. Ngµy so¹n: 1/12/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /12/2010. Unit 8: places Period: 46 Lesson 2: A. Asking the way (A3). Individual. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span> I/ Objectives. - Học sinh tiếp tục ôn các cấu trúc hỏi và chỉ đờng, đồng thời ôn lại cấu trúc hỏi khoảng cách giữa hai địa điểm qua cấu trúc: How far is it from . . . to . . .? - Luyện kỹ năng hỏi đáp/Củng cố kỹ năng nghe xác định vị trí. II/ Language contents. The simple present tense with the Structures of asking and answering the way III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher – Warm up - Have Ss play a game : Networks . whole class 5’ - Call 2 students from 2 groups to go to the board and write down . - Remark . Whole class Presentation - Ask Ss to look at the street map carefully . 10’ - Ask them to call the places in the street map . Individual - Have Ss say about the places’ positions . Pair - Introduce the question and answer about the places . Example : Where is the bank ? The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant . It’s opposite the hospital . Practice 15’. Production 10’. - Ask Ss to look at 8 places in the box and the street map . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about these places . - Call some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .S1 :Where is the police station ? S2: The police station is between the post office and museum . It’s opposite the stadium . S1: Where is the shoe store ? S2: The shoe store is between the restaurant and the hotel . It’s opposite the supermarket - Correct the mistakes if necessary . - Ask Ss to look at the street map again . - Explain the aims of the exercise to Ss : Listen to the directions then find out the places . - Make model : Go straight ahead to the third street , tunr right , what is between the movie theatre and the bakery ? It’s toystore . - play the tape for Ss ( 2 or 3 times ) - ask them to exchange the results with their partners . - Play the tape again for Ss to check the results - Correct the mistake then give the correct answers . a. Souvenir shop b. Shoe store c. Hotel d. Drugstore e. Hospital. Teacher whole class. –. Pair Teacher whole class Whole class Individual Individual Pair. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span>  Give some places for Ss to practice : Restaurant / museum / book store - Ask Ss to give the directions to these places . - Call on some Ss to give the directions in front of the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . Consolidation - Repeat ss how to ask the way and give directions 2’ Homework 3’. Write the directions to 8 places in the box . _ Do exercises in BTBS . _Prepare part 4,5 .. V.Ajustment:. Ngµy so¹n: 7/12/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /12/2010. Unit 8: places Period: 47 Lesson3 : A. Asking the way (A4, A5). I/ Objectives. - Ôn lại cấu chúc hỏi và chỉ đờng đồng thời nắm vững cấu trúc hỏi khoảng cách giữa hai địa điểm qua cấu trúc: how far is it from .... to.....? II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : _ A long way _ Have a guess _ Coach 2. Structure : It takes + time + to get ……. How far is it from …….to …….? The simple present tense with the Structures of asking and answering the way III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher – Warm up - Have Ss play a game : Hangman ( 3 words ) whole class 5’ + The first word has 6 letters . It is used for asking bout distance . + The second word has 5 letters . It is used for measuring distances . + The third word has 8 letters . It is also used for measuring distance. - Remark . Presentation a. Listen and repeat . Then practice the dialogue with Whole class the partner. 10’ -Introduce the aim of the lesson , then explain some new words and structures . Individual + A long way ( n ) Pair + Have a guess.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span> + Coach ( n ) + It takes about 18 hours to get there by coach . - Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and listen to the tape . -Ask Ss some questions about distance using : asking and answering about distance How far is it from + name of this place + to + name of other place? It's + about + distance + km/m - Ask ss to translate the dialogue into Vietnamese Example : How far is it from your house to school ? How far is it from Nam Dinh to Ha Noi ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and read after the tape .- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask Ss to answer the question : How far is it from Hue to Ho Chi Minh city ? How far is it from Hue to Ha noi ? Practice . Look at this table of distances in km . Ask and answer 15’ questions with a partner. - Ask Ss to look at the map and the table in the book carefully . - Make example : How far is it from Vinh to Hanoi ? It’s about 319 km _ Have Ss work in pairs asking and answerring about the distances . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . Ask Ss to write down in the notebooks . Production * Ask Ss to practice in pairs , using the street map about 10’ the stores and the table b in language focus 3 , then make a conversation about giving direction . - Make example : S1 : Could you tell me how to get to the bookstore from the library ? S2 : Go straight ahead to the park , take the first street on the left and go along Hue street . The bookstore is betweenthe minimart and the restaurant . S1 : How far is it from the library ? S2 : about 500 meters . S1 : thank you . S2 : You’re welcome . - Ask them to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake and ask them to write down Consolidation - Repeat ss how to ask and answer about distance. Teacher whole class. –. Pair Teacher whole class Whole class Individual. Individual Pair. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span> 2’ Homework 3’. - Do exercise 2 at page 48 in work book . - Prepare part B1. V.Ajustment:. Ngµy so¹n: 10/12/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /12/2010. Unit 8: places Period: 48 Lesson 4: B. At the post office (B1,2) I/ Objectives. - Giúp học sinh làm quen với các cấu trúc ngôn ngữ để hỏi thông tin ở dịch vụ b u điện qua: + CÊu tróc hái gi¸ c¶: How much + do/does + S + cost? + C¸ch yªu cÇu lÞch sù: Would like . . . ? Is/Are + S - Luyện tập các cấu trúc dùng trong bu điện, thực hiện lời yêu cầu lịch sự, hỏi đáp về giá c¶ - Nâng cao kỹ năng nghe và thực hành đoạn hội thoại đồng thời học sinh biết cách xây dùng 1 ®o¹n héi tho¹i míi dùa trªn ®o¹n héi tho¹i cã s½n II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - Envelope ( n ) - Altogether ( adv ) - to send ( v ) - Change ( n ) - To mail ( v ) - to receive ( v ) 2. Structures : - I’d like to + V + …….. - How much does/ do + S + cost ? - How much is / are + S ? III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher – Warm up whole class 5’ - Ask Ss some questions such as : Where do you often buy stamps ? Which services are supply at the post office ? - Remark and lead in the new lesson . Presentation 10’. - Hang the pictures about the post office on the board and supply ss newwords Sending letter: göi th Post card: bu thiÕp Sending/ receiving parcel: göi/ nhËn bu kiÖn Making long/ short distance phone calls: Buying envelopes/ stamps: mua phong b×/ tem - We will hear a conversation in the post office. You. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span> listen to the tape ans answer the questions in your book - Open the tape first time - Explain ss structures  I'd like to + V  I'd like + N - Ask ss to give examples Ex: I'd like to send a letter to the USA Ex2: I'd like some stamps *Ask and answer about prices  How much + do/does + S + cost?  How much + is/are + S? Ex: How much does this book cost? It costs 5.000 dong - Require ss to practice the dialogue in pairs - Call some pairs of students to read aloud the dialogue before class - Open the tape twice or three times. Ask ss to listen and answer questions in part "Now answer the questions" - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some students to answer questions - Correct mistakes if have and give correct answers a) Liz will mail the letter to the USA b) She pays 11.500 dong together c) She receives 3.500 dong in change - Open the tape once more. Pause each sentence to answers and explain newwords Altogether: tÝnh céng, tÝnh gép l¹i Change: tiÒn lÎ/ tiÒn thõa tr¶ l¹i - Ask ss to discuss in groups/ in pairs in part "About you" Do you usually use the services in the post office? How often? * Activity 2: - Make up a new dialogue and practice. Base on the conversation in part 1. You make up a similar conversation Practice 15’. a. Listen and read then answer the questions. - Introduce the situation of the dialogue and explain some new words : +Local stamp ( n ) : (Real thing) + Writing pad ( n ) : + Phone card ( n ) : + Post card ( n ) : + Oversea mail ( n ) :  Checking technique : What and where - Ask Ss to guess 3 things Hoa wants from the post office . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . - Write down on the sub- board . - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape .. - Ask Ss to check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give 3 things Hoa wants from the post office .. whole class. Pair Teacher whole class Whole class Individual. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span> - Correct and give the correct answer :. + Some local stamps . + Some stamps for overseamail . + A phone card . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers for the questions in the book . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.. - Correct the mistake then give the correct. answers a. Hoa needs some local stamps , some stamps for overseamail and a phone card . b.She needs stamps for overseamail because she has a penpal in America . c.She needs a phone card to phone her parents once a week . Production 10’. -Ask Ss to write a passage using the questions given + Where is your nearest post office ? + How can you get there from your home ? + What can you buy there ? + Hwo much is it to mail a letter in Viet nam ? + What else can you do at the post office ? - Go around class and provide help . - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and remark Consolidation - Repeat ss how to ask and answer about distance 2’ Homework 3’. - Learn by heart new words and structures by write 2 lines for each word and make 3 sentences for each structure . - Do exercise 1 at page 50 in workbook . - Prepare part 2,3 .. V.Ajustment:. Ngµy so¹n: 15/12/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /12/2010. Unit 8: places Period: 49 Lesson 5: B. At the post office (B3,4,5) I/ Objectives.. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span> - Nâng cao kỹ năng nghe và thực hành đoạn hội thoại đồng thời học sinh biết cách xây dùng 1 ®o¹n héi tho¹i míi dùa trªn ®o¹n héi tho¹i cã s½n - Më réng vµ n©ng cao mÉu c©u yªu cÇu lÞch sù, hái gi¸ khi sö dông c¸c dÞch vô trong bu ®iÖn. - LuyÖn tËp kü n¨ng nghe hiÓu viÕt gi¸ cña 1 sè v¨n phßng phÈm. II/ Language contents. 3. Vocabulary : - Local stamp ( n ) - Overseamail ( n ) - Phone card ( n ) - Postcard ( n ) - Writing pad ( n ) 4. Structures : Review : - Post office vocabulary . The simple present with : Need / Would like III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Teacher – Warm up whole class 5’ Presentation 10’. Practice 15’. b) Complete the dialogue . Then make up similar dialogues ; use the words in the box . - Introduce the aim of the exercise to Ss : Complete the dialogue with the suitable words - Have Ss do the exercise . - Ask them to exchange the result with the partner - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class - Correct and give the correct answer . Hoa : I would like five local stamps and two stamps for America . Clerk : Here you are . Is that all ? Hoa : I also need a fifty thousand dong phone card . How much is that altogether ? Clerk : That is seventy – five thousand dong . Hoa : Here is eighty thousand dong . Clerk : Thanks . Here is your change . - Call on 2 pairs to read the completed dialogue aloud .  Ask Ss to make up similar dialogues , using the words in the box . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . .Pre – listening : - Ask Ss to look at the things in the book , then call the names of these things . - Introduce the things Mrs Robinson will buy , and ask them to predict what Mrs Robinson will buy first , second … and predict how much she spend on each of these 5 items . - Have Ss work in groups .. - Call on some groups to give their predictions .. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher whole class. –. Pair Teacher whole class Whole class Individual. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span> 3.While – listening : - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their predictions about the order . - Call on Ss to give the answers . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers + Envelopes . + A pen . + A writing pad . + Stamps . + A phone card . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and check the price . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct the mistake and give the answer key : + Envelopes : 2,000 dong + A pen : 1,500 dong + A writing pad : 3,000 dong + Stamps : 500 dong + A phone card : 50, 000 dong Ask Ss to answer the question : What is the total cost ? How much change will Mrs Robinson have from 60,000 dong ? - Ask Ss to write down the questions and answers in the notebooks . 4.Post – listening : - Have Ss answer the questions in part 5 . - Make example : T : How much is it to mail a local letter in VN ? S : It is 800 dong . - Ask them to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . Correct if necessary and ask them to write the questions and the answers in the notebooks -Ask Ss to write a passage using the questions given Individual Production + Where is your nearest post office ? Pair 10’ + How can you get there from your home ? + What can you buy there ? + Hwo much is it to mail a letter in Viet nam ? + What else can you do at the post office ? - Go around class and provide help . - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class . Consolidation - Repeat ss how to ask and answer about distance 2’ Homework 3’. - Ask Ss to make the dialogue , using mapped dialogue given ; CLERK. ……Some envelopes and some post cards .. YOU Here….is …..all ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span> …send…letter…USA. How much………?. 9,500 dong. …30,000dong phone card . How much…altogether ? 45,000dong Thank you …….welcome . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistake . - Have Ss work in pairs ( one is the clerk , one is the customer ) making the dialogue at the post office . - Call on 2 pairs to go to the board and make the dialogue . V.Ajustment:. Ngµy so¹n: 17/12/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /12/2010. REVISION Period: 50 I/ Objectives. - ¤n l¹i mét sè ng÷ ph¸p träng t©m cña kú I + Th× HT§, HTTD, TL§, TLG + Các mẫu câu đề nghị và Ving + C¸c cÊp bËc so s¸nh + C¸c mÉu c©u hái - VËn dông lµm bµi tËp II/ Language contents. Review : - The present progressive tense . - The simple future tense . - Comparative . - Asking and answering about distance . - Exclamation . - Adverbs of frequency . - Asking and answering about the price . - Making suggestions . - Invitation. - Asking the way . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Warm up - Greetings . 5’ - Chatting some questions with Ss .. Activities Teacher – whole class. Presentation. Whole. The present progressive tense :.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span> 10’. - Ask Ss to give the form and use of the present progressive class. tense :  Form: ( + ) S + am / is / are + V-ing . ( - ) S + am / is / are + not + V- ing . ( ? ) Am / is / are + S + v- ing ?  Use : It is used to express an action which is happening at a time at present . It usually goes with adverbs of time such as : now / at the moment / at present . Examples: She is listening to music at the moment . They are playing marbles in the yard now . - Have Ss make sentences as model . The simple future tense : - Have Ss give the form and the use in front of the class . * Form : ( + ) S + Will + V ( without To ) . ( - ) S + Will not + V ( without To ) ( ? ) Will + S + V ( without To ) ?  Use : It is used to express an action or a plan which will happen in the future . It usually goes with adverbs of time such as : Tomorrow , Next week / month / year ….. Example: She will go to Ha noi tomorrow . They will have a party next week . - Ask Ss to make sentences . Comparative : a) Short adjectives : - Have Ss give the form : S1 + Tobe + adj + er + than + S2 . EX: She is taller than me . This ruler is longer than that one . - Have Ss make sentences in front of the class . b) Long adjectives : _ Ask Ss to give the form : S1 + Tobe + more + adj + than + S2 . EX: This pen is more expensive than that one . He is more inteligent than his brother .  Especial cases : Good / well => better Bad / ill => Worse Many / much = > More Little => Less Far => Farther / further . Asking answering about distances : - Ask Ss to give the structure about asking and answering the distances : How far is it from……….to…………..? It’s about …………….km/m EX: How far is it from your house to school ? It’s about 2 km . How far is it from NamDinh to Ha Noi ? It’s about 90 km . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . Exclamations : What + a / an + ( adj ) + N ! What + ( adj ) + Ns !. Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class. Individual Pair. Teacher – whole class Whole class. Individual. Pair. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span> EX : What a nice picture ! What a cold day ! What naughty boys ! - Have Ss make sentences . Adverbs of frequency : Always / usually / often / sometimes / seldom / rarely / never …. - Ask Ss to say about the position of adverbs : Ex : He always gets up at 5:00 in the morning . I am never late for school . Asking and answering about the price : How much + is / are + S ? => S + is / are + ………. How much + does / do + S + cost ? => It/ They + costs / cost + …….. Ex : How much does this shirt cost ? => It costs 50,000 dong . How much are these envelopes ? => They are 2,000 dong . Making suggestions : - Let’s + V . - Should we + V ? - How about + V-ing ? - What about + V-ing ? - Why don’t we + V ?  Agreement : OK / I’d love to /That’s a good idea .  Disagreement : + I’m sorry , I can’t . + I’m sorry , I can’t . I’m busy . + I’d love to but I’m going to……… + Thanks anyway . EX : Let’s go to Lan’ house . Should we play table tennis ? What about going to the movies ? Why don’t we go to the beach ? Invitation. Would you like + N ? Would you like + to V ? EX : Would you like to go to the concert with me ? Would you like to come to my house for lunch ?  Yes , I’d love to / Yes , please / All right .  No, thanks / I’d love to but I’m busy . Asking the way : - Is there ……near here ? / Where is …….? - Could you tell me how to get there ? - Could you show me the way to the ……..? - How can I get there ?  Go straight ahead / go long this street . Take the first / second street on the left / right ./ Turn right / left . EX : Could you show me the way to the post office ?  Go straight ahead , Take the first street on the right . It is opposite the police station . Buying things : I’d like + N Can I have a/ some + N , please ? I need to buy an English book , please ? Practice. Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets ..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span> 15’. Production 10’ Consolidatio n 2’ Homework 3’ V.Ajustment:. a. Tomorrow ( be ) ………..my birthday , so I would like you to come to my house for dinner tonight . b. You shouldn’t make noise when our teacher ( teach ) ……………….. c. The next Sunday will be Lan’s birthday so I ( buy ) ……………………..a gift for her tonight . d. Chi ( have ) ………………….a lot of English books . e. Minh never ( go ) ………………..to the zoo by bike . f. Listen ! She ( play ) …………………the piano . g. We usually ( play ) ………………….Blindman’s bluff at recess. h. My father never ( drink ) ………………….coffee , but at the moment he ( drink ) ………………….it i. I’d like ( buy ) ……………………some envelopes . j. The children enjoy ( read ) …………………………..picture books . Exercise 2: Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . a. She doesn’t have as many toys as I . => She has …………………………………………………………………. . b. There is less coffee in my cup than there is in your cup . => There is ………………………………………………………………… … c. I don’t have so many friends as my sister . => I have ………………………………………………………………… …. d. My friends have more candies than I . => I don’t My brother drinks more coffee than my sister . => My sister drinks e. She eats more chocolate than I . => I eat f. She has less flour than he has . => He has There are more students in my class than there are in her class . => There are g. There is less water in a dessert than there is in a mountain . => There isn’t h. There are fewer singers in a small city than there are in a big city . => There aren’t Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed . - Repeat ss how to ask and answer about distance. Ask ss to do the exercise. Ngµy so¹n: 18/12/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /12/2010. Pair. Teacher – whole class. Whole class. Individual. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span> REVISION Period: 51 I/ Objectives. - ¤n l¹i mét sè ng÷ ph¸p träng t©m cña kú I + Th× HT§, HTTD, TL§, TLG + Các mẫu câu đề nghị và Ving + C¸c cÊp bËc so s¸nh + C¸c mÉu c©u hái - VËn dông lµm bµi tËp II/ Language contents. Review : - The present progressive tense . - The simple future tense . - Comparative . - Asking and answering about distance . - Exclamation . - Adverbs of frequency . - Asking and answering about the price . - Making suggestions . - Invitation. - Asking the way . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Warm up - Greetings . 5’ - Chatting some questions with Ss . Presentation 10’. 1. Present simple tense - Review ss how to use present simple tense and structute + S + V(s/es)+ ... - S + don't/ doesn't + V+ ... ?Do/ Does + S + V-inf+ ...? + S + do/does - S + don't/ doesn't 2. Future simple tense a. Use: It is used to express an action which will happen in the future b. Forms: + S + will +V+ ... - S + won't + V+ ... ?Will + S + V- + ...? + S + will - S + won't 3. Preposition - Ask ss to give prepositions: on, in front of, under, behind, next to, between, from......to, opposite, between.....and, by, with 4. Compariston of adjectives a. Comparative of adjectives S1 + be + adj -er + than + S2 S1 + be + more + adj + than + S2 b. Superlative S + be + the + adj-est + .... Activities Teacher – whole class Whole class Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span> Practice 15’. S + be + the + most + adj... 5. Is there.../Are there.....? a. Is there a .........? Yes, there is/ No, there isn't b. Are there any + N(s)...? Yes, there are/ No, there aren't 6. Question words: How, How much, How many, How far, How long, How often, What, When, Where, Who Exercise 3 : Choose the best anser . 1. Hurry or you’ll be late ……………….school . A. with B. for C. at 2. My homework ……………………about two hours each day . A. takes B. has C. gives 3. Our summer vacation starts in june . It ……….almost two months . A. happens B. takes C. lasts. Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Pair. Teacher – whole class. 4. What do you do ……………the vacation ? A. during B. while C. when 5. We have fun ……………together on the farm . A. working B. work C. to work 6. We don’t have classes on Saturday , but we work one hour ………..each day . A. more B. much C. many Whole class 7. Viet namese students have …………vacations than American ones . A. few B. fewest C. fewer 8. Many women work …….home . A. at B. in C. on Individual 9. They take …………..of the house and look after the children . A. care B. homework C. notice 10.My brother always goes to bed early , but he …………..gets up early . A. not B. never C. ever Exercise 4: Give the correct form of the adj/ adv in parentheses . 1. This house isn’t very modern . I want a ( modern) ………………….one . 2. That building is the ( high ) ……………..one in our town . 3. Nam is a good tennis player . I think he is the ( good ) …………in the club . 4. My bag isn’t very heavy . Your bag is ( heavy ) ………………….. 5. We don’t know many people . You know ( many ) ………………..people than us . 6. It is a very bad film . It’s the ( bad ) ………….film I’ve ever seen . 7. What is the ( long )……………….river in the world ? 8. Tuan doesn’t work hard . I work ( hard ) …………………… 9. She doesn’t know much . Her sister knows much ( much ) …………………. Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed . Production 10’ Consolidation - Repeat ss how to ask and answer about distance 2’. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span> Homework 3’ V.Ajustment:. Ask ss to do the exercise. Ngµy so¹n: 25/12/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /12/2010. REVISION Period: 52 I/ Objectives. - ¤n l¹i mét sè ng÷ ph¸p träng t©m cña kú I + Th× HT§, HTTD, TL§, TLG + Các mẫu câu đề nghị và Ving + C¸c cÊp bËc so s¸nh + C¸c mÉu c©u hái - VËn dông lµm bµi tËp II/ Language contents. Review : - The present progressive tense . - The simple future tense . - Comparative . - Asking and answering about distance . - Exclamation . - Adverbs of frequency . - Asking and answering about the price . - Making suggestions . - Invitation. - Asking the way . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Chat Warm up 5’ Presentation 10’. 1, Would you like + to V/ N ? 2, S + would like + to V/ N . 3, let’s + V ... 4, what about + Ving...? how about + Ving...? 5, Why don’t you + V? 6, V + O ... - want need + to V buy - Đứng sau động từ thờng + to V. Activities Teacher – whole class Whole class Individual Pair Teacher whole class. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span> - What + be +. ¿ name surname mildename ¿{{ ¿. What is you name? What do/does +S + do? What + be + TTSH job? What + be + TTSH + address? It is + n¬i chèn Where + do/does + S + live S + live(s) + n¬i chèn How far is it from ... to...? It is Many Ns be + S How Much N T§T + V S + be/V .............. How much do/does + S + cost S + cost(s) ... How much is/ are +S +...? S + is/are ... Could/can you tell/show. ¿ howtogetto . .. thewayto .. . ¿{ ¿. Whole class. Individual Pair. Teacher whole class. –. Whole class. Individual. How long does it take .... It takes ........... Pair 1, So s¸nh ngang b»ng S1 + be/v + as + adj + adv + as + S1 2, So s¸nh kh«ng ngang b»ng S1 + be/v as/so + adj + adv + as + S2 3, So s¸nh h¬n Teacher a, So s¸nh adj/adv(short) S1 + be/V + adj/adv +er + whole class than +S2 b, So s¸nh adj/adv (long) S1 + more be/V +than + S2 *Chó ý - TÝnh tõ ng¾n 1 ©m tiÕt - TÝnh tõ dµi tõ 2 ©m tiÕt trë lªn - 1 sè adj/adv ngo¹i lÖ - 1 sè adj/adv 2 ©m tiÕt kÕt thóc b»ng “y” lµm theo c«ng thøc ng¾n 4, So s¸nh h¬n nhÊt a, So s¸nh h¬n nhÊt (ng¾n) S +be/V +the + adj/adv est b,So s¸nh h¬n nhÊt (dµi) S +be/V +the most + adj/adv * Chó ý: 1 sè adj/adv ng¾n + dµi gièng so s¸nh h¬n 5, So s¸nh Ýt h¬n víi danh tõ a, Ns S1 + be/V + fewer +Ns + than + S2 b, N S1 + be/V + less +N + than + S2 6 , So s¸nh Ýt nhÊt víi N a, S + be/V + the fewest +Ns ....... b, S1 + be/V + the least +Ns ......... 7, So s¸nh nhiÒu h¬n N S1 + be/V + more NS N than + S2 8, So s¸nh nhiÒu nhÊt N S1 + be/V +the most NS .......... N. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span> Practice 15’. 1: Hello, Nga. Nice to ........................... you again. A. see B. read C. listen D. write 2: Hoa is in class 7A and........................ is Nam. A. but B. so C. too D. there 3: Hoa’s new school is ........................... than her old school. A. very big B. big C. biger D. bigger 4: Her old school has ........................... of students. A. lot B. lots C. a lots D. many 5: Please tell Nga I’ll ............................. her again after six. A. speak B. say C. tells D. call 6: Phong is calling and Han is ........................... the phone. A. speaking B. telling C. answering D. saying 7: There are 28 ....................... 29 days in February. A. in B. on C. or D. and 8: Mai: What will you ....................Lan on her birthday? Nga: A red hat. A. give B. get C. eat D. drink 9: Red is my ...................... color. A. like B. favorite C. love D. lovely 10: A farmer works on a ........................... . A. factory B. hospital C. school D. farm 11 : .......................... a beautiful day ! A. It B. What C. How D. Is 12 : Tell me ...................... your school, Lan. A. of B. in C. at D. about 13 : We have math .................... Tuesday morning. A. in B. at C. on D. of 14 : ................ racks have magazines and those have newspapers.. A. This B. That C. These D. There 15 : Washington DC is the .................. of the USA. A. city B. capital C. country D. street 16 : In .................., we study the world rivers and mountain ranges. A. English B. Physics C. Music D. Geography 17 : They talk ............ their class and friends. A. at B. on C. in D. about 18 : In Geography, we study different countries and ........ people.. Pair. Teacher whole class. Whole class. Individual. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span> A. his. B. her. C. my. D. their 19 : The most popular activity at recess is ................ A. noisy B. talking C. basketball D. study. 20 : Activities at recess are the same all ............. the world. A. in B. on C. over D. of. 21: Hoa lives ......................... her uncle in Ha Noi. A. at B. in C. on D. with 22: Hoa doesn’t ..................... any friends in Ha Noi. A. is B. has C. have D. does 23: Nice to meet you .............................. , Lan! A. so B. and C. again D. then 24: Lan: Good bye, Nga. See you .......................... . Nga: Bye. A. later B. late C. early D. longer 25: December is the .......................... month of the year. A. twelve B. twenty C. twelveth D. twelfth 26: The fifth month of the year is ........................ . A. June B. July C. May D. March 27: Mai: What time will you ........................ the party? Nga: At 9.30 PM. A. see B. meet C. leave D. watch 28: My grandparents live in the country but I live in ............... city. A. the B. an C. at D. on 29: My father is .......................... work now. A. in B. on C. at D. with 30: Are there .......................... stools in your room? A. a B. an C. any D. and 31 : A doctor .................. care of sick people. A. gets B. takes C. talks D. gives 32 : Mrs Na: Is this apartment suitable ............. you ? Mr Jones: Yes, I think so. A. for B. of C. in D. about 33 : You can find science books ...................... the shelves here. A. of B. at C. to D. on 34 : A....................... works in a library. A. farmer B. nurse C. doctor D. librarian 35 : In ...................., I learn how to read stories and poems in Vietnamese. A. English B. Literature C. Math.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span> D. Arts. 36: Students in the USA have a twenty – minute ...................... in the morning. A. time B. classroom C. break D. dinner 37 : Which ................. do you like best ? . –It’s English. A. room B. classes C. subject D. school. 38 : She learns ................. to use a computer in Computer Science class. A. how B. what C. which D. who 39 : Who is the .................. of "Truyen Kieu" ? It’s Nguyen Du. A. teacher B. student C. author D. journalist. 40 : Dryer, washing machine and .............. are household appliances. Production 10’. Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed .. Consolidation - Repeat ss how to ask and answer about distance 2’ Homework 3’ V.Ajustment:. Ask ss to do the exercise. Ngµy so¹n: 27/12/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /12/2010. REVISION Period: 53 I/ Objectives. - ¤n l¹i mét sè ng÷ ph¸p träng t©m cña kú I + Th× HT§, HTTD, TL§, TLG + Các mẫu câu đề nghị và Ving + C¸c cÊp bËc so s¸nh + C¸c mÉu c©u hái - VËn dông lµm bµi tËp II/ Language contents. Review : - The present progressive tense . - The simple future tense . - Comparative . - Asking and answering about distance . - Exclamation . - Adverbs of frequency . - Asking and answering about the price . - Making suggestions . - Invitation. - Asking the way . III/ Teaching aids.. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span> - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player.. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Chat Warm up 5’. Contents. Activities Teacher – whole class. Presentation 10’. 1. Time Whole class - Repeat ss h¬ to ask and answer about hour What time is it? Individual What is the time? Pair It's + hour + o'clock It's + hour + minutes It's + minutes + past/ to + hour Teacher – It's + a quarter + past/ to + hour whole class It's + half + past + hour 2. Subjects - Ask ss to repeat all of subjects: Math, Physics, History, Chemistry, Civic education, Physical education, music, art 3. Present progressive tense - Repeat ss how to use and form of present progressive tense + S + be + V-ing + ... - S + be + not +V-ing + ... ?Be + S + V-ing + ...? Whole class + S + be - S + be + not 4. Adverbs of frequency a. Use: It is used to express the degree of frequency. It stands before ordinary verb and after to be b. Form: S + be + adv + S + adv + V-(s/es) + ... S + Mv + V-inf+ ... 5. Suggestions/ Invitations Whole class Let's + V-inf+.. Why don't we + V-inf ....? What about + V-ing+ ...? Should we + V-inf+ ...? Individual Would you like to + V-inf ...? - Answer: * Agree: OK/ I'd love to * Disagree: I'm sorry. I can't 6. Ask and answer about distance Pair How far is it from this place to other place? It's about + distance + km/m 7. Directions Can you show me the way to .....? Can you tell me how to get to .....? Teacher – 8. Comparative of noun whole class S1 + V + fewer + plural countable noun + than + S2 S1 + V + less+ uncountable noun + than + S2 S1 + V + more+ plural countable noun + than + S2 S1 + V + more+ uncountable noun + than + S2. Practice 15’. 51: Mai: How are you today, Lan? Lan: .................... fine, thanks.. Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span> A. Very B. Pretty C. Just D. Much 52: Hoa is unhappy ........................ she misses her parents and friends in Hue. A. so B. much C. too D. because 53: We go to work ............................. bus every day. A. on B. by C. in D. to 54: . What is your .......................... name? . It is Nguyen. A. full B. second C. family D. third 55: My birthday is ..................... November 6th. A. at B. by C. in D. on 56: Mai ........................ be 13 on her next birthday. A. is B. will be C. will D. does 57: Lan will ......................... some of her friends to her birthday party. A. tell B. meet C. invite D. see 58: The party will start at 6.00 A.M and ...................... at 9.00 A.M A. finish B. finishes C. finishing D. to finish 59: The radio is next ......................... the television. A. to B. on C. at D. with 60: Mi: What ....................... your father do, Ha? Ha: He’s a policeman. A. is B. do C. are D. does 61 : Lan: Is this your ......................... time in Hanoi ? Hoa:Yes, it is. A. one B. two C. first D. new. 62 : She will watch T.V but she ......................... see a movie. A. will B. isn't C. doesn't D. won't 63 : Mai: ................ can I find a literature book, please ? Mrs Lan: On that shelf. A. Where B. Why C. What D. Which 64 : English books are ...................... the back of the library. A. at B. on C. in D. from. 65 : There are a lot of books in our school .......................... . A. farm B. garden C. yard D. library 66 : I like English ......................... it's very interesting. A. but B. because C. so D. that 67 : What are Ba and Nam doing ? . ................... watching T.V.. Teacher whole class. Whole class. Individual. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span> A. He's B. They C. They're D. They'll.6 68 : Hoa has a letter ........................ her friend . A. from B. in C. on D. at. 69 : Hai’s favorite subjects at school are Math and ................... A. Music B. marbles C. Atlas D. globe. 70 : Mr Tan: ..............your mother cooking now ? Mai: No, she’s watching TV. A. Does B. Is C. Do D. Are. 71: Mr Tu: Is your .................. name Le Van Ba? Ba: No, it’s Ta Van Ba. A. middle B. first C. family D. full 72: I live ...................... 12 Tran Hung Dao Street. A. on B. at C. in D. with 73: My house is ........................... 3 kilometers from school. A. in B. of C. at D. about 74: ........................ aren’t many students in Hoa’s school. A. Have B. Has C. These D. There 75: Van: ..................... is your telephone number? Chi: It’s 846 502. A. Where B. How C. How many D. What 76: ........................... you be free tomorrow evening? A. Shall B. Will C. Do D. Are 77: Hanh: ..................... will you get to Lan’s house, Dung? Dung: By bike. A. How B. What C. Which D. How many 78: Du: What .................. will you play at the party? Thuy: We’ll play cards. A. fun B. activities C. games D. play 79: Come in and ....................... a seat! A. do B. is C. give D. have 80: A farmer works hard from morning .......................... night. A. at B. on C. in D. till 81 : We ............... badminton every afternoon. A. do B. play C. have D. go Production 10’. Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed .. Consolidation - Repeat ss how to ask and answer about distance 2’. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span> Homework 3’ V.Ajustment:. Ask ss to do the exercise. Ngµy so¹n: 15/12/2010 Ngµy d¹y: /12/2010. Unit 9: Period: 55. At home and away Lesson1: A. A Holiday In Nha Trang. I/ Objectives. - HS làm quen, biết cách dùng và cấu tạo của thì quá khứ đơn. - BiÕt c¸ch hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ mét kú nghØ/ mét chuyÕn ®i d· ngo¹i. - Luyện kỹ năng nghe và luyện đọc đoạn hội thoại, phát triển phản xạ thông tin qua các trß ch¬i trªn líp theo néi dung cña bµi. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - Aquarium ( n ) - Gift ( n ) - Delicious ( adj ) - To be : was / were - To have => had - To buy => bought - To take => took - To go => went - To talk => talked - To return => returned - To visit => visited 2. Grammar : The past simple tense . III/ Teaching aids: Make a plan./Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher – Warm up - Ask Ss some questions such as : whole class 5’ + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ? - Remark and lead in the new lesson . Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book , then introduce the Whole class Presentation situation of the lesson . 10’ - Explain some new words to Ss : + Aquarium ( n ) : Individual + Gift ( n ) : Pair + Delicious ( adj ) : + To be : was / were ( past ) + To have : had ( past ) Teacher – + To take : took ( past ) whole class + To go : went ( past ) + To buy : bought ( past ) + To talk : talked ( past ) + To return : returned ( past ) + To visit : visited ( past ) Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. a. Past simple tense.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span> Practice 15’. Production 10’ Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’. * Use: it is used to express an action that completely finished in the past. This tense always goes with "yesterday, last, ago" * Formation: 1. "To be" + S + was/ were+ ... - S + was/ were + ? Were / Was + S +..? Yes, S +were/was / No, S + Weren't/ wasn't 2. Ordinary verb + S + V-ed + - S +didn't + V-inf+ ... ? Did + S + V-inf+....? Yes, S + did / No, S + didn't * Irregular verb Take – took Buy- bought Have- had - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the question : What places did Robinsons visit and what did they do there ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and repeat after the tape - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Introduce quickly the past simple tense , then ask Ss to find out the sentences in the past . - Ask them to exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class - Remark and give the correct answer : 1. Liz went to Nha Trang . 2. Liz visited Tri Nguyen aquarium . 3. Liz bought souvenirs . 4. Liz returned to Ha noi . - Liz talked to Ba about her vacation Give some cues then ask Ss to practice asking and answering . + Vacation / wonderful + Food / delicious + Things / expensive -Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - EX: How was the vacation ? It was wonderful . - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game. Whole class. Whole class. Pair. Teacher – whole class. Whole class. Individual. Individual Pair. - Repeat ss how to use the past simple tense - Repeat ss how to describe an action which happen in the past - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 1 at page 53 in workbook . - Prepare A2.. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Unit 9: Period: 56 I/ Objectives.. Ngày soạn 4/1/2010 Ngày dạy 7/1/2010 At home and away Lesson2: A. A Holiday In Nha Trang (A2, A3).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span> - Học sinh tiếp tục làm quen thì quá khứ đơn giản, mở rộng vốn từ, biết thêm các động tõ bÊt quy t¾c kh¸c ë th× QK§. - BiÕt c¸ch hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ mét kú nghØ/ mét chuyÕn ®i d· ngo¹i. - Luyện kỹ năng nghe và luyện đọc đoạn hội thoại, phát triển phản xạ thông tin qua các trß ch¬i trªn líp theo néi dung cña bµi. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - Shark ( n ) - Crab ( n ) - Dolphin ( n ) - Cap ( n ) - Turtle ( n ) - Exit ( n ) - To eat => ate - To see => Saw - To think => thought - To wear => wore 2. Grammar : The past simple tense . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Teacher – Warm up - Greetings . whole class 5’ - Have Ss play a game : Palmanism : Go , have , went , talk , bought , had , take , took , talked . - Remark . Presentation 10’. 2.Pre- reading : - Introduce the lesson : In the last period , we heard Liz telling about her vacation in Nha trang with her family . In today’s lesson , we will read the text about one of the most interesting and memorable activities which Liz and her family did during the vacation – the visit to Tri Nguyen aquarium . - Explain some new words to Ss. + Shark ( n ): + Dolphin ( n ) : + Turtle ( n ) : + Crab ( n ) : + Cap ( n ) : + Exit ( n ) : + To eat => ate ( past ) + To see => saw ( past ) + To wear => wore ( past ) + To think => thought ( past )  Checking technique : What and where * Matching : Eat wore See thought Wear ate think saw - Remark .  Before reading the text , ask Ss to do exercise : T or F prediction . a. The Robinsons went to TN aquarium .. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher whole class. Whole class. Whole class. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span> b. They saw many different types of fish . c. Liz bought a little turtle . d. They had lunch at a food stall. e. Liz ate fish and crab . - Ask Ss to discuss in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions. 3.While – reading : - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check their predictions . - Call some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : a. T b. T c. F d. T e. F -Have Ss read the text in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the text again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : a. Liz’s parents went to the aquarium with her. b. They saw many different types of fish …. c. They bought a cap in the souvenir shop . d. Yes, she did . She wore the cap all day . e. Yes, they do . Mr and Mrs Robinson ate fish and crab . f. Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the aquarium . 4.Post – reading : - Ask Ss to tell the story of Liz’s trip to TN aquarium , using the pictures . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and tell thestory , using the pictures . - Remark and give marks . Practice 15’. 1. Pre – listening . - Introduce the situation of the listening , then ask Ss to read 5 pairs of sentences in the book . - Explain some new words to Ss . + Unfortunately ( adv ) >< Fortunately ( adv ) + Peaceful ( adj ) : + Calm ( adj ) : + Roadside restaurant ( n ) : + Peanuts ( n ) : + To drive => drove ( past )  Checking technique : Rub out and remember . - Ask Ss to read the sentences again and guess which sentences they are going to hear . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . Sentence a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j. Individual. Pair. Teacher whole class. –. Pair. Teacher whole class. Whole class. Individual 2. While – listening : - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction . ( 2 times ). –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span> - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again and ask Ss to check the answers. - Correct and give the correct answers . b, d , e , h , j Exercise : Complete the passage . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and complete the passage . Liz was excited as the bus …1……..through the countryside . Everything …..2……. calm and peaceful. At 4 o’clock the bus …3…… at a small roadside restaurant . Mrs Robinson …..4…… some peanuts and an ice cream for Liz . The bus …5 . …. in Ha noi at about 7 p.m . - Call some Ss to give the results which they have heard . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. drove 2. looked 3. stopped 4. bought 5. arrived 4.Post – listening : - Have Ss work in pairs interviewing Liz about her family’s trip back to Hanoi . EX: + How did you travel back to Hanoi ? +What did you see on the way back ? +How did everything look ? +Were you tired ? +When did you arrive in Hanoi? - Call on some pairs to role play in front of the class . - Remark Play games Individual Production Pair 10’ Consolidation - Repeat the content of Liz's trip with family to the Aquarium 2’ - Repeat irregular verbs Homework 3’. - Ask ss to do the exercise. V.Ajustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................ ………….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span> Ngày soạn 7/1/2010 Ngày dạy 9/1/2010. Unit 9: Period: 57. At home and away Lesson 3: A. A Holiday In Nha Trang (A4, A5). I/ Objects. - Học sinh tiếp tục làm quen thì quá khứ đơn giản, mở rộng vốn từ, biết thêm các động tõ bÊt quy t¾c kh¸c ë th× QK§. - Häc sinh tiÕp tôc luyÖn kü n¨ng nghe hiÓu ph¸t hiÖn c¸c chi tiÕt gièng vµ kh¸c nhau trong b¨ng. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : - To keep in touch - To teach => taught - To rent => rented - To improve => improved - To move => moved 2. Grammar : The past simple tense . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Call one student to go to the board to tell the story of Teacher – Warm up Liz's trip to Tri Nguyen Aquarium whole class 5’ Whole class Presentation * Activity 1 - Divide class into 2 teams. Write the list of the 10’ information about the Robinsons' trip. Ask ss to play " True/ False repition drill" Individual Pair True Fasle 1. The Robinsons went to Vung X Tau Teacher – 2. They didn't visit Tri Nguyen x whole class aquarium 3. Mrs Robinson bought a poster V Practice 15’. * Activity 2 A. Pre-reading Do you write diary? What do you always write in your diary? - Require ss to practice in groups, tell about the things which are the most memorable - Liz and Ba are friends. This morning they met each other. Can you guess what they talked about? B. While-listening - Require ss to read Ba's diary wishperly - Make questions about the content of the text. Where did Liz and her parents arrive in Hanoi from? What does Mr. Robinson do? How old is Liz? What does Ba collect? - After finishing reading lesson. Now make these. Pair. Teacher whole class. –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span> sentences true Ex: Mr. Robinson cam to Vietnam on vacation - Mr Robinson came to Vietnam to work - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some ss to read loud the results before class - Others remark and give correct answers a) Liz lived next door to Ba b) Liz learned Vietnamese in Vietnamese c) Ba collects stamps d) Liz's aunt lives in New York e) The Robinsons moved to the other side of Hanoi f) The Robinsons moved. Now Ba is sad g) Ba will see Liz next week - Call some ss to read the text again - Ask ss to remark and correct mistakes - Supply ss newwords Improve: Keep in touch: Rent - rented: Move- moved: Bring - brought: C. Post-listening - Ask ss to write diary about yesterday. Who finishes first, He/She will go to the board. If it is interesting, the teacher will give mark - Ask Ss to imagine Liz is their new friend . Write a Production letter to one of their friends to tell him or her about Liz 10’ and her family . EX: Dear………, I’m glad to tell you that I have a new friend . Her name is Liz . She is American . ………. - call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . - Play games Consolidation Repeat Ba's diary and irregular verbs 2’ - Write again the letter in the exercise book. Homework - Do exercise 4 at page 54 in workbook . 3’ - Prepare part B1,2. V.Adjustment:. Whole class. Individual. Individual Pair. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................................... Unit 9: Period: 58. Ngày soạn 9/1/2010 Ngày dạy 11/1/2010 At home and away Lesson 4: Neighbors B1,2. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh tiếp tục luyện tập thì quá khứ đơn giản qua tình huống bài học mới và các từ vùng, cÊu tróc cã trong bµi. §ång thêi HS «n l¹i cÊu tróc c©u c¶m th¸n ë d¹ng: What + N! II/ Language contents. 1.Vocabulary : - Hairdresser - Neighbor - Dressmaker - Material -To make => made - To cut => cut.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span> 2.Grammar : The past simple tense in negative and interrogative . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents - Greetings . Warm up - Have Ss play a game : Pelmanism 5’ come , improve , wore , came , received , improved , receive , wear , teach , taught . Demonstrate the group which is winer Presentation A. Listen . then practice with a partner . - Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess what they are doing 10’ - Introduce : Lan and Hoa are friends . they are talking . Now you listen to the tape and tell me what they are talking about - Play the tape for Ss . - Explain some new words to Ss : + Hairdresser ( n ): + Dressmaker ( n ) : + Neighbor ( n ) : + Material ( n ) : + To make ( v ) => made + To cut ( v ) => cut - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . * Checking technique : Rub out and remember Drill speaking skill through the dialogue What + N ! What a nice dress! What a clever dress! What a nice neighbor! -Ask Ss to listen to the tape again then answer the question . Practice - Correct and give the correct answer : 15’ They are talking about Hoa’s hair , dress . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read after the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : a) She is a hairdresser . b) She is a dressmaker .  Answer : - Introduce the form of short answers . - Make model sentences : + Did Hoa buy the dress ? No, she didn’t . + Did her aunt cut her hair ? Yes , she did . - Ask Ss to practice in pairs using the information in the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . Production. _ repeat the form of short answer of the past simple tense .. Activities Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Pair. Teacher – whole class. Whole class. Individual. Individual.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span> 10’. - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game . EX: Yesterday I went to a ……and I bought a/ an ….. + Did you go to ………..? + Did you buy ………….? Remark Consolidation Repeat ss the content of the dialogue - Structure exclamations: What + N ! 2’ Homework 3’. Pair. - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them . - Do exercises 1,2 at page 55, 56 in workbook . Prepare part 3,4 .. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Unit 9: Period: 59. At home and away Lesson 5: Neighbors B3,4. Ngày soạn 11/1/2010 Ngày dạy 14/1/2010. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh tiếp tục luyện tập thì quá khứ đơn giản qua bài đọc hiểu với chủ đề mới: Cô hàng xãm (The neighbor) cïng c¸c cÊu tróc, tõ míi liªn quan: hobby, cushion, learn how to... - HS luyện kỹ năng đọc hiểu, trả lời câu hỏi đồng thời luyện kỹ năng viết hoàn thành câu ở thì quá khứ đơn giản. II/ Language contents. 1.Vocabulary : - Hobby - To sew - Sewing machine - To decide => decided - Cushion - To try => tried - Useful - To fit => fitted 2.Grammar : The simple past tense . Wh – questions to talk about past activities . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher Warm up - Ask Ss some questions : – whole 5’ + What did you do lastnight ? class + Did you watch TV ? + Did you do your homework ? + What time did you go to bed ? A. Read . Then answer . Whole Presentation - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new class 10’ words : + Hobby ( n ) : + Sewing machine ( n ) : Individual + Cushion ( n ) : Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span> Practice 15’. Production 10’. Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’ V.Adjustment:. + Useful ( adj ) : + To sew ( v ) : + To decide ( v ) => decided ( past ) + To try (v ) => tried ( past ) + To fit ( v ) => fitted ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually .  Checking technique : What and where .  Exercise : T or F prediction . 1) Hoa decided to learn how to sew . 2) She didn’t buy some material. 3) She made a cushion for her armchair . 4) Next, She made a shirt . 5) It was blue with white flowers on it . - Have Ss do exercise in groups - Call on some groups to give their predictions - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the results . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud . - Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out the answers for the questions . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers a) She learned how to use a sewing machine . b) She made a cushion for her armchair first . c) It was blue and white . d) Next , she made a skirt . e) It was green with white flowers on it . f) It looked very pretty . g) She tried it on but it didn’t fit . h) Hoa’s neighbor helped her . i) Finally, It fitted very well. B. Write . Put the verbs in brackets in the simple past tense . - Introduce the aim of the exercise to Ss . - Ask Ss to read the sentences . - Ask them to complete the sentences with the form of the verbs in the past simple tense . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down - Correct and give the correct answer : Watched – bought – cut – used – decided – was – made – was – wasn’t – helped – fitted - Repeat the form of Wh- questions : Wh- + did + S + Verb….? EX: Where did you buy this shirt ? I bought it in the shop . What did you do lastnight ? I watched TV . - Ask Ss to ask and answering using Wh – questions - Repeat the content of the passage - Repeat ss how to use the verbs in the past simple tense - Learn by heart part remember by making sentences with them - Do exercise 3,4 at page 56,57 in workbook .. Teacher – whole class. Whole class. Individual. Pair. Teacher – whole class Individual Pair. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................ ………….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span> Period: 60. Language Focus 3. Ngày soạn 14/1/2010 Ngày dạy 16/1/2010. I/ Objectives. + Ôn lại thì quá khứ đơn: * Cấu tạo. * C¸ch dïng. + Sö dông vµo lµm c¸c d¹ng bµi tËp. + Ôn lại các động từ bất quy tắc. II/ Language contents. - The past simple tense . - How much is it ? - Prepositions of places . - Comparatives . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Warm up - Greetings . 5’ - Ask Ss some questions about what they did lastweek . EX : What did you do last weekend ? Did you go to the library ? Did you visit you grandparents ?. Activities Teacher – whole class. Presentation 10’. Whole class. 1. Ask and answer about the price How much + be + S ? S + be + price + dong 2. Preposition a) near, beside, next to, opposite, between, to the right, to the left, in front of, behind b) Ask and answer about the distance How far is it from this place to others? It's (about) + distance + km/m 3. Past simple tense a) Use: It is used to express an action which happened in the past. This tense goes with yesterday, ago , last b) Forms: + S + V-ed + ... - S + did + not + V-inf + ... ? Did + S + V-inf + ...? Yes, S + did No, S + didn't 4. Simple tenses a. Present simple tense + S + V()s/es) + ... - S + do/ does + not + V-inf + ... ? Do/ Does + S + V-inf + ...? Yes, S + do/does No, S + don't/ doesn't 5. More, less and fewer More + N (uncoutable and plural countable). Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class. Individual.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span> Practice 15’. Production 10’ Consolidation 2’ Homework 3’ V.Adjustment:. Less + N (uncoutable) Fewer + N (plural countable) 1. How much is it? Lan: How much is the blue hat? Assistant: It's 15.000 dong Lan: And what about the yellow? Assistant: It's 12.000 dong 2. - The bookstore is between the restaurant and the minimart. It's on Hue street - The hairdresser's is on Tay Ho street. It's opposite the library Ex: How far is it from the clothing store to the bookstore? It's about 450 km - Write the past form of the verbs Help-helped Remember- remembered Take-took Send-sent Think-thought Talk-talked b. talked/ bought/ worked/sent 4. Nga: Everyday I clean my room, help Mom and study English Nga: I cleaned my room, helped Mom, studied English ,watched TV, played volleyball, stayed at Hoa's house Nga: I will study Engish, clean my room, help Mom, see a movie, visit my grandmother, buy new shoes Have Ss do test yourself in workbook. Pair. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair. - Repeat the structures which Ss have learnt . - Redo all exercises in the exercise book . Prepare part A1- unit 10.. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Unit 10: Period: 61. Ngµy so¹n 16/1/2010 Ngµy d¹y 18/1/2010 Health and hygiene Lesson 1: A. Personal hygiene A1.2. I/ Objectives: - Học sinh tiếp tục ôn tập thì hiện tại đơn giản và quá khứ đơn giản đồng thời làm quen với từ, cụm từ và cấu trúc về chủ đề vệ sinh cá nhân (Personal hygiene) nh: take morning exercises, get up, eat candy. - Luyện kỹ năng đọc hiểu. II/ Language contents. 1.Vocabulary : - Harvest - To take morning exercises - Helpful - To iron - To hope - Probab 2.Grammar :- The simple present tense - The simple past tense . III/ Teaching aids: Make a plan. Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span> Warm up 5’ Presentation 10’. Practice 15’. Let ss play "Noughts and crosses" took learned Taught made borrowed Thought bought helped Decided A. Pre-reading Do you remember Hoa? What do you remember Hoa? Where does she come from? Which school does she study in? Where does she live now? Who does she live with? Where do her parents live? * Newwords Taking morning exercises: Get up early: Take care of oneshelf: Don't eat too much candy or stay up late: * Check vocabulary: Rub out and remember - Hoa's parents live in Hue and she lives and studies in Hanoi. You are going to read the letter which Hoa's mother sent her. Can you guess what her mother wrote in the letter. B. While-reading - Open the tape the first time. Look at the book and listen - Ask ss to read the letter whisperly - Call some ss to read the letter before class - Next, ask ss to answer questions - Compare the results with a partner - Call some ss to read the results aloud - Remark and give correct answers a) They are busy because it is nearly harvest time b) Hoa's grandfather helps them on the farm c) They will go to Hanoi soon, after the harvest d) Now Hoa is different. She gets up early and does morning exercises everyday e) Hoa's mother wants her to do her own washing and ironing. Hoa's mother doesn't want her to eat too much candy or stay up late C. Post-reading - Ask ss to practice in groups What do you do in themorning/afternoon/evening? Do you brush your teeth in the morning or before bedtime? A. Pre-listening 1 Newwords: Polish: Pants: Sandals: Iron clothes: * Check vocabulary: Rub out and remember * Guess what Hoa is doing in the pictures a) Put on clean clothes b) Polish her shoes c) have breakfast d) at recess, she ate her sandwiches, then she drank some water and talked with her friends e) At home, she changed into red pants and a shirt, and put on her sandals g) go to bed B. While-listening - Open the tape the first time - Make questions: what did Hoa do? - Open the tape twice or three times. Ask ss to put the pictures in the correct order you here. Teacher – whole class Whole class Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Whole class. Individual. Pair. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span> - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some students to read the results loud before class - Give correct answers a) e) f) d) g) c) h) b. c. Post-listening - Let ss play "Rub out and rememberz" - Ask Ss to imagine they are Hoa.Write a letter to her mother Production - Have Ss exchange the letter with their partners . 10’ - Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the content of the letter 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . Homework - Rewrite the letter in the exercisebook . 3’ V.Adjustment:. Individual Pair. 20/1/2010 Unit 10:. Health and hygiene Period:62 Lesson 2: A. Personal hygiene A3,4. I/ Objectives: - Häc sinh biÕt c¸ch nãi vµ viÕt vÒ nh÷ng viÖc lµm hµng ngµy, tiÕp tôc lµm quen, «n l¹i các từ, cụm từ về chủ đề vệ sinh cá nhân. - Häc sinh luyÖn kü n¨ng viÕt dùa tªn nh÷ng th«ng tin cã s½n vµ hoµn thµnh bøc th bằng cách điền và cách chia động từ hợp lý. II/ Language contents. 1.Vocabulary : - To polish - To comb - To change - Sandals - Pants - To drink => drank 2.Grammar : Review the past simple tense III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher – Warm up - Ask Ss some questions about themselves : whole class 5’ + What time do you get up everyday ? + What time do you have breakfast ? + What time do you go to bed ? Presentation 10’. Practice speaking and writing about the work everyday - Ask ss to look at 3 - This is Nam’s diary. You look at it and work in pairs. Ask and answer about Nam’s daily routines T: What does Nam do everyday? S: He gets up, does morning exercises T: What time does he get up? S: He gets up at 6. 30 -Ask ss to use Nam’s diary. Write your own activities in a day - Practice with a partner + What do you do everyday? + What time do you get up/ eat breakfast/do your homework/. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span> Practice 16’. Production 10’. go to bed? A. Pre-reading - In the last period, you read the letter from Mom to Hoa. Do you remember what Hoa’s Mom asked her to do? - Require ss to practice in pairs or in groups by playing “Brainstorming” - You are going to read the letter from Hoa to Mom. Can you guess what she wrote in the letter? B. While-reading - Ask ss to complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with suitable verbs. - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some ss to read the verbs loud before class - Give correct answes Was/ having/ show/ take/ get/ go/ wash/ iron/ eating/ told/ see/ go. -Notice: Structure, how to write a letter in English - Name of the sender and date , month - Salutation: Dear - Complimentary close: Love, lots of love, with much love, your loving daughter/ son/ with all my love C. Post-reading - Write on the board what Hoa did or didn’t do Get up early/ take morning exercises/ go to bed early/ play volleyball/ clean room/ wash clothes/ eat breakfast - Ask Ss to write a letter to their penpal telling what they do everyday . - Go around class and provide help . - Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . - Remark .. Pair. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair. Consolidation - Repeat ss how to write a letter 2’ Homework 2’. - Write the letter in the notebook . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 63 in workbook . - Prepare part B1. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Unit 10: Period :63 I/ Objectives.. Health and hygiene Lesson 3: B. A bad toothache B1. 22/1/2010.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span> - Häc sinh lµm quen c¸ch hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ r¨ng miÖng qua c¸c tõ, côm tõ: fill cavity, fix one's tooth, scared, hurt... - Học sinh nâng cao kỹ năng luyện tập theo cặp, hỏi đáp các tình huống theo chủ đề trong bµi. II/ Language contents. 1.Vocabulary : - Dentist - To fill - Appointment - To hate - Drill - To hurt - Cavity - Scared 2.Grammar : - The simple present and past tense - What’s the matter ? = What’s wrong ? Review the past simple tense III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Have Ss play a game : Hangman Teacher – Warm up Matter , Worry , tooth , Feel whole class 5’ - Remark . Presentation 10’. - Hang the pictures about toothache’s problem on the board - Make up questions + What’s the matter with Minh (the boy in the picture)? + If you have a toothache like Minh (the boy in the picture), what will you do? + When you go to the dentist, what will the dentist do? - Introduce ss newwords Have an appointment: To be scared: Fill cavity: Hurt: Fix one’s tooth: -Read first. Ask ss to read in chorus - Call some ss to read newwords before class. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. * Check vocabulary: Rub out and remember. Practice 15’. Production. - Open the tape the first time. Ask ss to look at part 1. - Open the tapethe second time. Ask ss to listen and repeat Pair - Ask ss to practice in pairs - Call some pairs of students to practice before class - Ask ss to answer questions - Compare the results with a partner Teacher – - Call some pairs of students to answer questions before class whole class - Give correct answers a. Minh has a toothache b. No, he doesn’t. The loudness of the drill scares him c. Because she had a toothache d. She filled the cavity in her teeth Individual.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span> 10’. -Ask ss to look at part “About you”. Practice in pairs - Call some students to read answers aloud before class. Pair. Consolidation - Let ss play “Rub out and remember” 3’ Homework 2’. - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 1 at page 63 in workbook . - Prepare part B2,3 .. V.Adjustment: ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... .... 24/1/2010 Unit 10: Period:64. Health and hygiene Lesson 4: B. A bad toothache B2, 3. I/ Objects. - Học sinh tìm hiểu thêm về chủ đề vệ sinh cá nhân, tiếp tục tình huống bài trớc (Minh bị đau răng và đi khám nha sĩ -> giới thiệu về nha sĩ Lai) đồng thời mở rộng vốn từ theo chủ đề : look after, give advice... - Häc sinh luyÖn kü n¨ng nghe hiÓu vµ tr¶ lêi c©u hái. II/ Language contents. 1.Vocabulary : - To explain - To remind - Sensibly - Surgery - To smile - To check - To notice 2.Grammar : Review : the simple present tense III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Teacher – Warm up - Greetings . whole class 5’ Have Ss play a game : Slap the board Whole Presentation Pre-listening - Let ss play “Matching” about the words in the last dialogue class 10’ 1. matter a. han rang 2. toothache b. cuoc hen.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span> 3. appointment c. so 4. fill a cavity d. van de 5. scared e. nha si 6. dentist f.dau rang 7. kind g. tu te, tot bung - Ask ss to use your own words to tell about Minh’s story. Ex: Minh has a toothache. He has an appointment with the dentist at 10.30 this morning but he is scared because he hates the sound of the drill. Hoa advices him not to worry because the dentist was very kind - You are going to listen to the tape about Dr. Lai, the woman Hoa mentioned in the conversation. Can you guess what she is like B. While-listening - Open the tape twice. Ask ss to listen and answer questions in the lesson - Open the tape the third time. Pause each sentence and explain newwords and new phrasal words. Remind sb to do sth: nhac nho ai do lam gi Clean teeth regularly: danh rang thuong xuyen Eat sensibly: an uong hop ly - Open the tape once more. Ask ss to read questions and answer them. Then compare the results with a partner - Call some students to read the results loud before class - Give correct answers: a. Dr. Lai is a dentist b. She wears uniform to work c. Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr. Lai d. She explains what will happen. She gives them advice. She tells them how to look after their teeth and she reminds them to clean their teeth regularly and eat sensibly C. Post-listening - Ask ss to practice in groups. Ask and answer questions Do you eat a lot of candy? How often do you clear your teeth? When did you last visit the dentist? How often do you visit the dentist? How is the dentist at our school like? Practice 15’. Production 10’. - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the questions : + What is the matter with Minh ? + How does he feel ? + What is the doctor doing ? + Why does that happen to Minh ? - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape ( two times - Have Ss read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text in front of the class . - Ask Ss to complete the story with suitable words - Have Ss exchange the results with their partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes then give the answer key : Minh is very nervous and Dr Lai notices this . She smiles to Minh and tells him not to worry . She explains one of his teeth has a cavity . He has to brush them regularly . After Dr Lai fills his tooth , Minh leaves . He is very pleased - Call on some Ss to read the completed the story aloud . Guessing games. Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Pair. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span> Consolidation Repeat the content of listening lesson about Dr. Lai 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . Homework - Do exercises 2,3 at page 65 in workbook . 3’ V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Unit 10: Period: 65. 26/1/2010 Health and hygiene Lesson 5: B. A bad toothache B4,5,6. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh tiếp tục luyện tập chủ đề vệ sinh răng miệng. - Luyện kỹ năng luyện tập theo cặp, nhóm về chủ đề trên. II/ Language contents. - Practice vocabulary about health and hygiene . - The present simple tense . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents - Greetings . Warm up “Chatting” 5’ Do your teeth hurt? How often do you go to the dentist? Do you worry about your toothache? Do you usually brush your teeth? Presentation 10’. Let ss play “Find someone who” Find someone who Dr. Lai Minh A kind Has a toothache Help children Is scared of seeing the dentist Look after children teeth Hates the sound of the drill - Ask ss to B4. Ask and answer questions with a partner. Use the words to help you. Activities Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Ex: Minh’s tooth hurts. Why? Because he has a cavity - Call some students to practice in pairs before class - Give correct answers:. Practice 15’. b. Minh is nervous. Why? Because he’s seeing the dentist The cavity is not serious. Why? c.The cavity is not serious. Why? Because it’s small d.Minh is very happy. Why? Because his teeth are OK a) Write . Complete this poster with a partner . - Introduce the situation and the aim of the exercise to Ss. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and examples.. Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span> - Have Ss look at the pictures and write sentences as model . - Ask them to exchange the results with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give their ideas in front of the class . - Correct the mistake . Production 10’. - Ask Ss to work in groups discussing the question: What should we do and what shouldn’t we do if we want to have healthy teeth? - Go around class and provide the help. - Call on some Ss from some groups to present their ideas in front of the class. - Remark and give marks . Guessing games. Teacher – whole class Individual Pair. Consolidation - Repeat the content of reading 2’ Homework 3’. - Write the poster : what should we do and shouldn’t do if we have healthy teeth ? - Do exercise 4 at page 65 in workbook . Prepare unit 11 – A1. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................ …………. Unit 11: Period: 66. 28/1/2010 keep fit and stay healthy Lesson 1: A. Check-up (A1). I/ Objectives. - Học sinh làm quen chủ đề sức khỏe qua các cấu trúc từ, cụm từ mới nh: chech - up, medical records, take one's temperature, masure, scales... cïng cÊu tróc yªu cÇu lÞch sù Would you + V...? - Häc sinh luyÖn tËp ®o¹n héi tho¹i theo cÆp, biÕt c¸ch s¾p xÕp theo thø tù c¸c sù viÖc x¶y ra trong ®o¹n HT. II/ Language contents. 1.Vocabulary : - Medical check – up - To measure - Medical record - To weigh - Height - Weight.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span> - Temperature - Scales. - To take one’s temperature - Normal 2.Grammar: - The structure : Would you + V ? - Review the simple present tense III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents - Greetings . Warm up - Ask Ss some questions such as : 5’ + Do you eat much candy ? + Do you often eat ice- creams? + How often do you brush your teeth ? + If you have healthy teeth , what should you do ? - Remark and lead in new lesson . Presentation In the last period, we learned about personal hygiene, teeth protection. In the following lesson, we will continue 10’ discussing topic on health: medical check-up and common diseases. -Require ss to look at pictures in A1 and make questions. Who are they in the picture? Where are they? What do you think they are doing? -Introduce ss newwords after listening to the tape the first A medical check-up: buoi kham suck hoe Medical records: phieu kham suck hue Fill in the medical record: dien vao phieu kham suckhoe Take one’s temperature: do nhiet do High : cao Height: chieu cao Measure: do Weigh: nang Weight: trong luong Scale: cai can Waiting room: phong cho -Introduce polite requests Would you + V-inf …, please? - Require ss to read the introduction and answer questions: Where are these students from? What are they doing? -The students of Quang Trung school is having a medical check-up. Can you guess what they will do in a check-up - Open the tape twice, require ss to listen and notice phrasal Practice words which you have just learnt 15’ - Require ss to practice in pairs - Call some pairs of students to read and translate the dialogue loud before class - Ask ss to look at part “Now answer. Number the sentences” Using information given in the conversation you practice. You put the following sentences in the right order. -Require ss to compare the answers with a partner - Call some ss to read loud before class - Give correct answers: 1-f, 2-d, 3-c, 4-g, 5-e, 6-a, 7-h. - Ask Ss to write the correct answer in the notebooks. - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .. Activities Teacher – whole class. Whole class Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Pair. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span> - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation .  Comprehension questions : -Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1. What were the students of QT school doing ? 2. LN 3. Who was doing the medical check – up ? 4. What did the nurse do ? 5. LN 6. What was Hoa’s temperature ? Was it normal? 7. What was her height ? 8. What was her weight ? How heavy was she ? Ask ss to practice in pairs the dialogue. Production 10’ Consolidation - repeat the main content of the lesson. 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . Homework - Do exercise 1,2 at page 66 in workbook . 3’ V.Adjustment:. Individual Pair. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ 30/1/2010. Unit 11: Period: 67. keep fit and stay healthy Lesson 2: A. Check-up (A2). I/ Objectives. - Häc sinh thùc hµnh c¸c cÊu tróc tõ, côm tõ míi nh: chech - up, medical records, take one's temperature, masure, scales... cïng cÊu tróc yªu cÇu lÞch sù Would you + V...? - Häc sinh tiÕp tôc sö dông c¸c cÊu tróc, tõ, côm tõ míi nh: chech - up, medical records, take one's temperature, masure, scales... cïng cÊu tróc yªu cÇu lÞch sù Would you + V...? - Häc sinh luyÖn tËp ®o¹n héi tho¹i theo cÆp, biÕt c¸ch s¾p xÕp theo thø tù c¸c sù viÖc x¶y ra trong ®o¹n HT. II/ Language contents. Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female 1. Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ? III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Warm up 5’ Presentation 10’. Contents - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : network. Activities Teacher – whole class. - Require ss to look at A3 and ask ss questions Whole clas Who are they in the picture? What is Hoa doing? Individual -Ask ss to read the dialogue wishperly and guess the rest Pair meaning of words.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span> - This is the conversation between Hoa and the doctor . However some words are missing. You listen to it. Find out the missing words and complete the conversation Practice 15’. Production 10’. - Open the tape twice or three times - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some pairs of students to practice the dialogue before class. - Remark and give correct answers Ask/ how/ your/ 50/ shorter/ me/ tall/ meter/ 45. Teacher – whole clas. Pair. centimeters/ will/ nurse/ height/ think/ no/ form -Ask ss how to ask about height, weight How + tall/ heavy + to be + S ? Doctor : I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa . How old are you ? Hoa : Fourteen . Doctor : And your height is one meter 50 centimeters ? Hoa : No. I think I’m shorter . The nurse measured me . Doctor : Oh . How tall are you ? Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters . Doctor : I will ask the nurse to check your height again . How heavy are you ? Hoa : I think I’m 42 kilograms . Doctor : No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms . - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue with the partner . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . Correct their pronunciation . - Close the book and answer questions about Hoa. How old is Hoa? How tall is she when the nurse measured her? Does she think she is taller or shorter?. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair. Consolidation - repeat the main content of the lesson. 2’ Homework 3’. - Do exercise 3,4 at page 67 in workbook . - Prepare part B1 .. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2/2/2010.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span> Unit 11:. keep fit and stay healthy Period: 68 Lesson 3: A. Check-up (A3). I/ Objectives. - Học sinh tiếp tục luyện tập chủ đề sức khỏe thông qua bài tập nghe hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại, đồng thời luyện tập theo cặp hoàn thành phiếu khám sức kháe (phiÕu y b¹). - Häc sinh n¾m v÷ng kü n¨ng nghe, ®iÒn th«ng tin vµo ®o¹n héi tho¹i vµ thµnh th¹o kü n¨ng luyÖn tËp theo cÆp, hiÓu vµ biÕt c¸ch ®iÒn th«ng tin vµo phiÕu kh¸m søc kháe b»ng TA. II/ Language contents. Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female 2. Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ? III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures.. Stages Warm up 5’. Contents - Ask ss some questions What is your name? Which grade are you in? Which class are you in? Are you a boy or a girl?. Activities Teacher – whole class. Presentation 10’. * Newwords: Forename: ten dem va ten chinh Surname: ho Male: nam Female: nu *Check vocabulary: rub out and remember - Introduce the situation of the exercise to Ss and explain some questions : + How tall is he ? = What’s his height ? + What’s his weight ? = How heavy is he ?. Whole clas. Practice 15’. - Require ss to look at A3 - Now you work in pairs, one of you is A and the other is B. Look at your copy of the medical record and cover the other copy. In turn, A and B about the missing and complete the record - Ask ss to understand the meanings of newwords - Require ss to practice in pairs - Give cue questions A B Which class is he in? Which school does he. Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Pair. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span> What is his surname?. go to? What are his forenames? How old is he?. Where does he live? What is his weight?/ how heavy is he? -Give new structures: What + be + Poss. Adj + N ?. - Ask ss to practice in pairs to get information Production 10’ Consolidation - Repeat ss how to ask and answer about personal information 2’ Homework 3’. Individual Pair. - Do exercise 3,4 at page 67 in workbook . - Prepare part B1 .. V.Adjustment: ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ ………….. Unit 11: Period: 69. 22/2/2010 keep fit and stay healthy Lesson 4: B. What was wrong with you? B1,2,3. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh tiếp tục luyện tập chủ đề sức khỏe thông qua bài tập nghe hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại, đồng thời luyện tập theo cặp hoàn thành phiếu khám sức khỏe (phiếu y bạ). - Häc sinh n¾m v÷ng kü n¨ng nghe, ®iÒn th«ng tin vµo ®o¹n héi tho¹i vµ thµnh th¹o kü n¨ng luyÖn tËp theo cÆp, hiÓu vµ biÕt c¸ch ®iÒn th«ng tin vµo phiÕu kh¸m søc kháe b»ng TA. II/ Language contents. 1. Vocabulary : Bad cold Sick note Headache Virus Stomachache Flu 2. Grammar :- The simple past tense : question forms and negative forms . - Structures : What is/ was wrong with SB ? I have/ had a headache . She has / had a bad cold . III/ Teaching aids. Make a plan, Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Make up some questions Teacher – Warm up How tall are you? whole class 5’ How heavy are you? How old are you? Whole clas Presentation - Ask ss to at B1 and ask questions Who do you think in the picture? 10’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span> Practice 15’. Production 10’. - Now, Look at the balloon 1: Lan was not there, she was absent What do you think Mr. Tan is asking Lan? - Let’s look at balloon 2 and answer What was wrong with her? - Cure ss to guess “sick” - We are listening to the conversation between Hoa and Mr. Tan. Yesterday Hoa was sick, you listen and find out the structures they use to talk about health What + is/ was + the matter/ wrong with sb? S + have/ has + name of illness * Newwords to be sick: èm a little tired: h¬i mÖt stay inside: ë trong líp häc sick note: giÊy xin phÐp nghØ häc virus: vi rut - Open the tape the second time - Call some pairs of students to practice in pairs before class - Now look at “Now answer”. Answer the questions . - Call some students to read answers loud - Remark and give correct a. Because she had a bad cold b. She had a headache c. Mr. Tan told Lan to stay inside at recess d. The doctor said that Lan had a virus e. The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note Ask ss to look at B2 - Ask and answer the given questions to complete the survey a. Were you ever absent from school last semester? b. Were you sick? c. Did you have a cold/ a stomachache/ a headache/ the flu? - Supply ss newwords before practicing to be absent from: vang mat, nghi hoc semester: kú häc cold: c¶m l¹nh flu: c¶m cóm a stomachache: ®au bông a headache: ®au dÇu - Ask ss to work in group of 4 as instructed. Fill in the names of students in the group and stick the illness which each of the students had. - Require ss to answer questions What was the most common illness? - According to the survey.: “What was the least common illness?” Open the tape twice or three times - Call some students to read the results before class - Give correct answers cold flu stomachache headache toothache. Total days lost: 112 - Open the tape once more. Explain newwords total: tæng sè absence: v¾ng mÆt due to: v×, bëi v× problem: vấn đề account for: chiÕm Consolidation - Ask Ss to compare the days lost through sickness in class. Individual Pair Teacher – whole class. Pair. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span> 2’. Homework 3’ V.Adjustment:. 7A with those in their own class - Ask some Ss to report in front of the class . EX: Last semester in class 7A , cold caused 10 days’ absence but in my class cold caused 7 days’absence ……. - Write the comparation in the notebooks . - Do exercise 3 at page 71 in workbook .. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Unit 11:. 24/2/2010 keep fit and stay healthy Period: 70 Lesson 5: B. What was wrong with you? B4,5. I/ Objectives. - Học sinh đợc cung cấp một lợng từ mới nhất định qua bài đọc hiểu về một bệnh cụ thÓ, mét bÖnh mµ hµng n¨m cã sè ngêi nhiÔm cao nhÊt - bÖnh c¶m thêng (the common cold): symptoms, runny nose, fever, coughing, sneezing, cure... - HS luyện kỹ năng đọc hiểu, trả lời câu hỏi về bệnh cảm thờng. II/ Language contents. 1.Vocabulary : - Disease - Symptom - Runny nose - Slight fever - To cough - To sneeze - To prevent - To relieve - Cure => to cure - To disappear 2.Grammar : The simple present tense III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Teacher – Warm up Greetings . whole class 5’ - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game - Ask Ss to write a disease which they caught last time in a paper sheet . - Have one student go to the board and others guess . - Remark , ask Ss some questions about the disease they caught and lead in the new lesson . Presentation 10’. - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then. explain some new words to Ss . + Disease ( n ) : BÖnh + Symptom ( n ) : TriÖu chøng + Runny nose ( n ) : Sæ mòi + Slight fever ( n ) : Sèt nhÑ + To cough ( v ) : Ho + To sneeze ( v ) : H¾t h¬i + To relieve ( v ) : Lµm gi¶m + To prevent ( v ) : Ng¨n ngõa + To disappear ( v ) : BiÕn mÊt. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span> + Cure ( n ) = > to cure : Ch÷a trÞ - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Have Ss play a game : rub out and remember in order to check new words . - Have Ss work in groups discussing the questions : + Why do people call the cold “ common “? + What are the symptoms of the common cold ? Call some Ss from groups to give their discussion in front of the class - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then Practice check their discussion . 15’ - Have Ss read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to answer the pre- questions . - Have some Ss read the text aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss read the text again and find out the answers for the questions in the book. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and asnwering the questions - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . Correct the mistake and give the correct answers : a) Because every year millions of people catch it . b) They are : a runny nose , a slight fever , coughing and sneezing . c) No, there is no cure for the common cold . d) No, these medicines don’t cure a cold , but they relieve the symptoms . - We can prevent a cold by eating well , doing exercise , keeping fit and staying healthy . Let ss play “Brainstorming” Production - Open the tape “Play with words”. Ask ss to listen and repeat 10’ Consolidation - Repeat the symptoms of the common cold 2’ Homework 3’. Pair. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair. - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 4 at page 73 in workbook . - Prepare unit 12- A1. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Period 71:. 26/2/2010. Test 45 minites I . Objectives:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span> Sau tiÕt häc häc sinh cã kh¶ n¨ng cñng cè thªm kiÕn thøc ng«n ng÷ , vèn tõ vùng µ thùc hµnh lµm bµi tËp còng nh nhËn ra nh÷ng kiÕn thøc m×nh cha n¾m b¾t mét c¸ch ch¾c ch¾n. II. Content : a. Grammar:. b. Past simple tense. S + V(ed) + O Did + S + V(inf) + O? Yes, S + did. No, S + didn’t S + did not + V(inf) + O c. Comparative with countable noun and uncountable nouns. Making up questions. B Vocabulary:. KiÓm tra c¸c tõ quanh chñ ®iÓm swcs khoer vaf giwx ginf veej sinh chung. B: ma trËn Chủ đề NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông TNKQ TL TL TL I. Reading 5 2.5 II. Language Phonetic 4 focus 1,0 8 Vocabulary 3 2,0 0,75 Grammar 5 1,25 III. Writing 5 2,5 Tæng. 20. 5 5,0. 5 2,5. 2,5. I: Choose the word which has the different pronunciation ( 1 ®) 1. A. visited.B. looked C. walked D. stopped 2. A. arrived B. lived C. moved D. washed 3. A. runny B. Sunny C. cure D. funny 4. A. nine B. fill C. kind D. like II. Choose the best answer: (2ps) Em hãy chọn một đáp án đúng (A, B, C hoặc D) để hoàn thành những câu sau 1. I drink .................milk than my brother. A. less B. fewer C. a little D. a few. Tæng 5. 20. 2,5. 5,0. 5 2,5 30 10.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span> 2. He eats ........... cakes than his sister.(He eats a cake. I eat two cakes) A. less B. fewer C.more D. a few 3. …………. is the matter with you? I have a toothache. A. Where B. How C. When D. What 4. .............. is the symptoms of common cold? A running nose , a flight fever, coughing and freezing. A. Where B. How C. When D. What 5.............. does it take you to go to school? About fifteen minutes. A. How long B. How old C. how far D. How many 6. ………….. are you? One m 45 cm. A. how far B. How long C. How tall D. heavy 7. The dentist filled a small cavity in my tooth so it stopped …………….after ward. A. to hurt B. hurting C. hurt D. hurted 8. Clean teeth are ……………….. teeth. A. good B. health C.healthy D. lucky. III. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets (2ps) (Em hãy sử dụng dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc) 1. Every day Nga (get up) ……….. at six. 2. She often (do)…………….. morning exercise. 3. He (visit) ..........................his grand father last week. 4. Liz (not eat)……………….. fish because she remembered the colorful fish in the aquarium. 5. You (watch) ……………….. TV last night? No. I did my home work. 6. They (play) ………………… soccer now. 7. What time ………you (go) …………..to bed last night? 8. I (have) ………………. lunch with my boyfriend yesterday. IV. Write answers about you. (2,5ps)(ViÕt c©u tr¶ lêi vÒ b¹n) 1. What’s your full name? ................................................................................................................................. 2. How heavy are you? ................................................................................................................................. 3. How tall are you? ................................................................................................................................. 4. Which school do you go to? ................................................................................................................................. 5. What did you do lastnight? ................................................................................................................................. V. Read the passage then answer the questions. (đọc đoạn văn rồi trả lời câu hỏi.) There is only one disease called common: the common cold. We call it in the common cold because every year millions of peop1e cut it. Everyone know the symptoms: a running nose, a slight fever, coughing and sneezing. It is very unpleasant, but nobody know a cure. At the drug store there are usually shelves with cold cure. These medicine don’t cure a cold, but they do relieve the symptoms. Whatever you do your cold will last for a few days then disappear. How can you prevent a cold? Eat well , exercise and you will be fit and healthy..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span> a) why do we call the common cold? ................................................................................................................................. b) What are the symptoms of common cold? ................................................................................................................................. c) Is there a cure for the common cold? ................................................................................................................................. d) How can you prevent a cold? ................................................................................................................................. e) Do you usually have a cold? ……………………………………………………………………………………. V. Adjustment: ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ..... 27/2/2010. Correction of the test. Period 72 I. Objectives: - Ch÷a bµi kiÓm tra 1 tiÕt cho häc sinh. - Sau giờ học hs có khả năng nhớ lại tất cả kiến thức đã học từ bài 9 đến bài 11và nắm đợc một số dạng bài tập cơ bản dùng trong bài kiểm tra. II. Skill knowledge & Language knowledge: (KiÕn thøc kü n¨ng & kiÕn thøc ng«n ng÷) * Skill knowledge: + Reading skill: Reading comprehension to answer the questions + Writing skill: Use some structures from unit 9 to 11 to rewrite some sentences. * Language knowledge: - Vocabulary: some newwords in unit 9, 10, 11. - Grammar: + The past simple III.Teaching aids: - Textbook, extra board of the test. IV.Procedures: Stages Content Warm up * Chatting: (Time:5min) -Ask ss some questions: (?) Did you do your test well? Was it easy or difficult? Do you want me to correct it?. Activities -T whole class.. &.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span> - T whole class.. &. -T Correct the -Hang the extraboard of the text on the board whole test ans get ss to go to the board and do one by one. class. (Time:23min) -Remark and correct mistakes. Evaluate the Class G K TB Y result of the 7a test 7b (Time:5min). &. Repeat the main knowledge in the test (Time: 10min). 1, Vocabulary: The newwords in two units 9 10, 11. Such as: healthy,hurt,…. 2, Structures: - How tall ……….? - How heavy ……..?. 3, Tenses: +The past simple +The present progressive tense +The present simple tense 4, Reading: Read a text about the disease: “the common cold” then answer the questions. Homework - Ask ss to do the test again at home. (Time:2min) - Ask ss to prepare the next lesson.. V.Adjustment: …………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………..... ...

<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span> Unit12: Period: 73. 27/2/2010. let’s eat Lesson 1: A. What shall we eat? A1,2. I . Objectives: - Học sinh làm quen với chủ đề mới: Thực phẩm. Qua các đoạn hội thoại nhỏ, học sinh sẽ đợc học một loạt từ mới về các loại hoa quả, thực phẩm nh: - Đồng thời học sinh ôn l¹i cÊu tróc Let's + V... vµ sö dông c¸c cÊu tróc kh¸c víi ý nghÜa t¬ng tù: What about + Ving...? Why don't we + V...? và làm quen với cấu trúc diễn tả sự đồng tình khẳng định/phủ định: too / so / either / neither. - Học sinh tiếp tục thực hành theo cặp, luyện tập đoạn HT và hỏi đáp theo chủ đề trong bài. II. Content : A: Grammar: - The simple present tense . - The structure : I’d like……. So do I / I do , too Neither do I / I don’t , either . B Vocabulary:. - Spinach - cucumber - Pineapple -To smell III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Warm up 5’. Presentation 10’. - Durian - Papaya - Ripe. Contents - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Kim’s game . ( Use the pictures or words written on the board of : fish , chicken , beef , milk , bananas, apples , carrots , oranges ) - Call the students to go to the board and write again . - Remark and lead in the new lesson Activity 1: Introduce food and how to use “too, so, either and neither” - Ask ss to look at pictures in A1 How many kinds of food/ fruits have yoy known in English in the picture? - Now you continue looking at the picture and make a list of the fruits/ food which you haven’t known their English names in Vietnamese - Supply ss newwords pork: thit lon spinach: rau chan vit cucumber: qua rua chuot pinapple: qua rua durian: qua sau rieng - Ask ss to read newwords following the teacher - Call some ss to read aloud before class * Check vocabulary: “Rub out and remember” - Yesterday, Hoa and her aunt went to the market. Can you guess what they bought? - You are going to listen to the conversation between Hoa. Activities Teacher – whole class Whole clas. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span> Practice 15’. Production. and her aunt in the market. After hearing the conversation you will know what they bought? - Open the tape in part 1 the dialogue - Introduce words and structures meat stall: quan ban thit a selection of: su suu tap, tap hop - How to express agreements + “so, too ” is used in the affermative + “either. neither” is used in the negative So/ Neither + Auxiliary verb + S S + Auxiliary verb + too/ either - Require ss to practice in pairs - Open the tape part 2 - Introduce ss newwords and structures vegetable stall: quay hang rau on display: trung bay, ban hate: ghet - Ask ss to listen to the tpae and practice in pairs - Open the tape whole dialogue. Ask ss to listen to the tape and repeat - Require ss to look at part “Now answer” and answer question: “What did Hoa and he aunt buy at the market?” - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Give correct answers: beef, spinach, cucumber, oranges Explain some sentences of Hoa and her aunt in the dialogues - Model sentences : S1: I don’t like pork . S2: Neither do I / I don’t either . S1: I like spinach and cucumbers . S2: So do I / I do , too. ( So and too are used in the formative sentences . Neither and either are used in the negative sentences .) EX: S1: I am a student . S2: So am I / I am , too . S1: I like beef . S2: I do , too . / So do I . S1: She isn’t a doctor . S2: I am not , either . / Neither am I . S1: I don’t like chicken . S2: I don’t , either / Neither do I . ( Not either = Neither ) 3.Practice : - Give some pictures or given words to Ss to practice . + Carrots . X + Beef V + Papaya V + Cabbage X + Fish X + Chicken V - Have Ss work in pairs using the structures they have just learnt and given words . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Have Ss practice in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . Remark . Have Ss take a survey .. Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class. Work in Group. Individual.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span> 10’ Homework 3’. Make example : S1: I like durians . Do you like them ? S2: Yes , I like them , too / So do I . - Learn by heart the structures by making 3 sentences with each . - Do exercise 2,3 at page 74 in workbook . Prepare part 3,4 .. Pair. Adjustment: ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span> 1/3/2010.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span> Unit12: Period: 74. let’s eat Lesson 2: A. What shall we eat? A3,4,5. I . Objectives: - Qua bài đọc hiểu, HS đợc học các bớc chuẩn bị một bữa ăn và công thức (recipe) làm một số món ăn nhất định bằng cách sử dụng các trạng từ: first, next, then... cùng các động từ nh: cook, boil, heat, stir-fry... - HS tiếp tục củng cố kỹ năng đọc hiểu, đồng thời biết cách viết một thực đơn và công thøc lµm mét sè mãn ¨n b»ng tiÕng Anh. - Qua bài đọc hiểu phần A3, h/s đã đợc học các bớc chuẩn bị một bữa ăn và công thức làm một số món ăn nhất định bằng cách sử dụng các trạng từ: first, next, then... cùng các động từ nh: cook, boil, heat, stir-fry, slice... Học sinh luyện tập hỏi đáp về đồ ăn, thức uống đã ăn ngày hôm qua. - HS biết cách ghép tranh với động từ tơng ứng. II. Content : Grammar:. - The simple present tense . - The structure : I’d like…….So do I / I do , too. Neither do I / I don’t , either .. B Vocabulary:. - To slice - Bowl - To boil - To heat - To stir- fry - Soy sauce - Chopsticks III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents - Greetings . Warm up - Ask Ss some questions : 5’ EX: Do you like chicken? Beef ? Do you know how to prepare a meal ?  Lead in the new lesson .. - Spoon. Presentation 10’ Activity 1. Whole clas. Practice 15’. A. Pre-reading Do you always cook meals? What do you think of this work? Do you like it? What do you have to do when you cook meals? - Supply ss some verbs slice: th¸i thµnh l¸t máng boil: luéc heat: h©m nãng stir-fry: xµo - Require ss to look at part 3 - Ask ss questions: What are they doing? They are preparing a meal a. What did Hoa’s aunt cook? b. What did she do first/ next? c. How did she boiled the spinach? d. What did she do last? e. What did Hoa do? B. While-reading - Require ss to read the text and answer above questions - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some ss to answer questions before class - Remark and give correct answers a. She cooked dinner b. First, she sliced the beef. Next, she sliced some green peppers and onions. Activities Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Pair. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span> Production 10’. Homework 3’ V.Adjustment:. c. She added a little salt to the spinach so it tasted good d. She sliced the cucumbers and made cucumber salad e. Hoa set the table with plates, bowls, chopsticks spoon and glasses - Give ss newwords green pepper: ít xanh salt: muèi vegetable oil: dÇu thùc vËt soysause: níc x× dÇu cucumber salad: sa l¸t da chuét plate: đĩa bowl: b¸t chopstick: đũa spoon: th×a glass: cèc C. Post-reading - Now ask ss to look at part “Answer the question” What did Hoa, her aunt and aucle have for dinner? - Write the menu: - Call some ss to read your own menu before class - Correct mistakes if have Menu: - Cucumber salad - Boiled spinach - Stir-fried beef with green peppers and onions - Rice - Now look at part b and do the followings. This is the recipe Hoa’s aunt used, You look at the passage again and add the missing verbs to complete the instruction and then match the instructions to the pictures - Call some ss to read the answers loud before class - Correct mistakes if have * Add the missing words 1. Sice the beef- C 2. Slice the green peppers and onions – F 3. Heat the pan – A 4. Stir-fry the beef – D 5. Add some soy sauce to the dish – B 6. Cook rice – E 7. Add salt to the spinach – G A. - Ask ss to look at the pictures and say again how to prepare a meal Write . What did you eat and drink yesterday ? - Ask some Ss the questions : what did you eat and drink yesterday ? - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . Activity 2: Play with words - Open the tape. Ask ss to listen to the tape and repeat - Explain newwords healthy food: thøc ¨n bç dìng steam: hÊp balanced meal: mét b÷a ¨n c©n b»ng - Do the exercises in the workbook. - Prepare the new lesson. Individual Pair. Whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span> ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Unit12: let’s eat Period: 75 Lesson 3: B. Our Food (B1). 2/3/2010. I . Objectives: - Học sinh biết cách nói về bệnh có thể gây ra từ thức ăn không đợc làm vệ sinh sạch sẽ nh stomachache qua c¸c cÊu tróc pháng ®o¸n: + It must be . . . . . / It was probadly . . . cïng hµng lo¹t c¸c cÊu tróc vµ tõ vùng kh¸c nh wash well, dirt, make sbd infinitive. - Học sinh tiếp tục nắm vững kỹ năng luyện tập đoạn hội thoại theo cặp, đồng thời làm quen víi kü n¨ng tr×nh bµy th«ng tin trong ®o¹n héi tho¹i díi d¹ng mét ®o¹n v¨n. II. Content : The structures : - It must be ………….. - It was probably ……… - Make + somebody + Adj/ Do smt . - Thepast simple tense and present simple tense . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - You are taking part in a recipe. Writing competition for rice Teacher – Warm up cooking. You now work in groups, using the verbs and whole class 5’ structures you have learned, write the steps for rice cooking in 5 to 10 minutes which group complete the recipe the most quickly will be the winner - Summarize and remark at the same time. Teacher give correct answers (First, you put water in a pot and boil it. Then put the rice in and stir. Next let it boil for 5 minutes. And leave on the store for 15 minutes. Finally serb it).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span> Presentation 10’ Activity 1. Practice 15’. - Ask ss to look at part 1 Where is Ba? Can you guess what’s wrong with him? (You can tell me what causes stomachache) - You are going to listen to the conservation between Ba and the doctor at the surgery. Ba had an awful stomachache. You listen and answer the questions What did Ba have a stomachache? - Open the tape. Ask ss to listen and answer - Call some ss to answer questions before class (He had a stomachache because he didn’t wash spinach well) - Explain ss phrasal words It must be: It is/ was probably: to make sb adj/ do sth: - Ask ss to give examples - Ask ss to practice the dialogue in pairs - Call some pairs of students to read aloud before class - Now look at “Now complete the story ” and complete the passage using the information in the conservation - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call ss to read the results loud before class - Remark and ask ss to give correct answers 1. doctor 2. sick 3. asked 4. had 5. spinach 6. wash 7. more carefully 8. vegetables 9. make 10. she Food Allergies? - To avoid stomachache and other food related diseases. What should we do and what shouldn’t we do?. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class. Production 10’. Individual  Now complete the story. Pair - Ask Ss to complete the story based on the dialogue above . - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class. - Correct and give answer key : Ba went to the doctor because he was sick . The doctor asked Ba some questions . Ba said he had some spinach last night . The doctor said he must wash the spinach more carefully/well. Vegetables can be dirty . The dirt can make people sick . She / the doctor gave Ba some medicine to make him feel better . Call on some Ss to read the story in front of the class. Homework 3’. - Learn by heart the structures by making 3 sentences with each ..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span> - Do exercise 1,2 at page 76,77 in workbook . - Prepare part B2. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ Unit12: Period: 76. let’s eat. 10/3/2010. Lesson 4: B. Our Food (B2). I . Objectives: - Học sinh đợc học về tầm quan trọng của thức ăn tới đời sống sức khỏe con ngời và nắm rõ khái niệm một chế độ ăn hợp lý, cân bằng (a balanced diet) qua các cấu trúc từ, cụm tõ: unhealth/healthy food, body-building food, moderate amount, energy, daizy products, cereals, healthylife style... - Tham khảo tháp thức ăn -> Giúp nhận thức về dinh dỡng trong đời sống. - Kỹ năng đọc hiểu. II. Content : 1.Vocabulary : - Balanced diet - Energy - To affect - Body- building food - Moderate - Dairy product - Amount - Cereals - Lifestyle - Plenty of 2.Grammar : III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Teacher – Warm up - Greetings . whole class 5’ - Ask Ss some questions such as : + What do you usually have for breakfast / lunch / dinner ? + What is your favorite food ? Remark and lead in new lesson . Presentation - Food plays an important part in our life. It gives us the main Whole clas energy for body development. Thus a balanced diet is 10’ expecially important. In our today’s lesson. We will learn Individual aout the defintion of a balanced diet and useful guidelines Pair about food. + What is your favorite food? + What do you always have for breakfast/ lunch/ dinner? Teacher – + Do you think your diet is balanced? whole clas - To know whether your diet is balanced or not, you will find the right answer in our today’s lesson - Supply ss newwords unhealthy food: thøc ¨n kh«ng bç dìng moderate amounts: khèi lîng hîp lý, võa ph¶i (n¨ng lîng) energy: n¨ng lîng balanced diet: chế độ/ khẩu phần ăn hợp lý, cân bằng fatty food: thøc ¨n giµu chÊt bÐo body-building food: thøc ¨n gióp phat triÓn c¬ b¾p dairy pruducts: thùc phÈm b¬ s÷a.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span> Practice 15’. Production 10’. a variety of: ®a d¹ng, nhiÒu lo¹i cereals: ngò cèc advantage: sù cã lîi * Check vocabulary: “Rub out and remember ” - Open the tape and ask ss to listen - Ask ss to read the passage again and answer questions - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some students to read answers loud before class - Remark and give correct answers a. Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you energy b. A balanced diet is not enough, all people need exercise to keep a healthy life - Ask ss to answer questions 1. What should we do in order to have a balanced diet? 2. What does “a balanced diet” mean? - Explain your answers - Call some students to read the passage loud before class - Ask some students to translate the passage into Vietnamese. - Ask Ss to do an exercise : Matching A lot of. Sugar Fatty food Should Meat A little Fruit Too much Coffee Deep- fried food Shouldn’t Vegetables Plenty of Eggs - Ask Ss match and talk about a balanced diet . - Make example : To have a balanced diet we should eat a lot of fruit - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some gr oups to give their dicussion in front of the class . Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat tha main content of this lesson 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. Homework - Write a menu for yourself and your family . 3’ - Prepare part 4 V.Adjustment:. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair. …………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………. Unit12: Period: 77. let’s eat. 12/3/2010. Lesson 5: B. Our Food (B3, 4,5). I . Objectives: - Qua bài học, hs hiểu thêm về tầm quan trọng của thức ăn tới đời sống sức khoẻ của con người và nắm rõ khái niệm một chế độ hợp lý, cân bằng..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span> - Luyện kỹ năng đọc hiểu, viết. II. Content : 1.Vocabulary : - Balanced diet - To affect - Moderate - Amount - Lifestyle 2.Grammar III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. - Prepare a cassette player. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Warm up 5’. Presentation 10’. Practice 15’. - Energy - Body- building food - Dairy product - Cereals - Plenty of. Contents - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . Balanced diet Dairy product Energy Amount Affect Body-building food Moderate - Have 6 students from 2 groups take part in the game - Remark and state the group which wins the game .. Activities Teacher – whole class. Whole clas - Ask ss to look at part 3 and introduce In the last period, you learned about a balanced diet. Today we will further study about this concept through a menu for yourshelf and family - Ask ss to look at pie chart and explain: These are three kinds of food: body-building, energy giving, protective - Require ss to write details of foods + Body-building: bread, fish, milk, chicken + Energy-giving: honey, candy, cake + Protective: pineapple, spinach - Now you write a menu for yourshelf and your family including details of breakfast, lunch and dinner. Remember to make your meal healthy and balanced - Now compare your menu with your partner’s suggestions - Give cure answers: + Breakkfast: milk, bread + Lunch: chicken, egg, spinach, pineapple + Dinner: fish, beef, cabbage, fruit - Ask ss to look at part 4 and say the names of foods in the pictures (Rice, noodles, fish, vegetables, fruits, beef, juice, water) - You are going to listen to a tape about Lan, Ba, Nga and Hoa. You hear and tell what they ate and drank among the food and drinks mentioned above by writing the letters a,b,c... next to each person corresponding with the food and drinks they used - Open the tape twice or three times - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some students to read answers aloud before class - Ask ss to remark and correct mistakes if have. Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span> - Give correct answers Lan: b-d-f-g Ba: c-a-e-h Nga: a-d-g Hoa: b-e-g Production 10’. - Let ss play “Networds” : food and drinks * Play with words - Open the tape and ask ss to listen and repeat. Individual Pair. Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat tha main content of this lesson 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each Homework - Write a menu for yourself and your family . 3’ - Prepare part 4 . V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Period: 78. 15/3/2010 Language Focus 4. I . Objectives: Giúp học sinh củng cố lại kiến thức cơ bản của 4 đơn vị bài( từ bài 9 đến bài 12) II. Content :  Past simple tense ; Indefinite quanlifiers ; Too and either ; So and neither III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Warm up 5’. Contents - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : + What did you do yesterday ? + Did you watch TV last night ? + What did you do during last summer vacation ? Remark and lead in new lesson .. Activities Teacher – whole class. Presentation 10’. 1. Past simple tense - Repeat ss how to use the past simple tense a. Use: it is used to express an action which happened in the past. This tense goes with “yesterday, ago, last” b. Form:  S + V-ed + ...  S + didn’t + V-inf + ....  Did + S + V-inf + ......? o Yes, S + did o No, S + didn’t - Ask ss to answer the questions. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span> 2. Indefinite quanlifiers - A lot of + uncountable and plural countable noun - Much + uncoutable noun - Many + plural countable noun 3. Too and either - Repeat ss how to use “too and either”. They always stand at the end of the sentences. Too is used in the affirmative and Either is used in the negative 4. So and neither - So and neither are used to say the agreement. So is used in the affirmative and Neither is used in the negative Form: So/ Neither + Auxilary verb + S Practice 15’. 1) Past simple tense : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and answer what they are doing . - Call on some Ss to answer the questions in front of the class Teacher – a) Watch TV . whole class b) Eat at a restaurant . c) Go to the movie theatre . d) Read books . e) Play soccer . - Have Ss answer the questions , using the pictures . - Make example : S1: Did you do your homework last night ? S2: No, I didn’t . I watched TV . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers . f) Did you eat dinner at home on Wednesday ? No, I didn’t . I ate dinner at a restaurant . g) Did you go to school yesterday ? No, I didn’t . I went to the movie theatre . h) Did you watch a video on the weekend ? No, I didn’t . I read books . i) Did you play basketball yesterday ? No, I didn’t . I played soccer . - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . 2)Indefinite quantifiers : - Have Ss repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use . - Ask them to do exercise 2 .  Write the correct expression . - Ask Ss to write the correct expression , using the pictures . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : + A little coffee . + A lot of salt . + A lot of tea . + Too much water . + A little sugar - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .  Complete the dialogues :.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span> - Have Ss look at the pictures and then complete the dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . *Too and either / So and neither . - Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either and neither . - Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front the class . - Have Ss play a game : Noughts and Crosses . Mangoes V. Bananas X. Papaya X. Corn. Spinach X. Potatoes X. Chicken X. Beef V. V. Fish X Production 10’. Repeat ss how to use  Past simple tense  Indefinite quanlifiers  Too and either  So and neither Imperatives Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat tha main content of this lesson 2’ - Ask ss to learn by heart structures Homework - Ask ss to prepare old lesson to check 45 minutes 3’. Individual Pair. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ 20/3/2010 Unit13: Period: 79. activities Lesson 1: A. Sports A1,2. I . Objectives: - Häc sinh biÕt thªm 1 sè tõ míi vÒ thùcphÈm, rau qu¶ - ¤n l¹i cÊu tróc: let’s - Diễn đạt ý thích hay không thích món ăn ( thực phẩm) gì - làm quen với cách biểu đạt sự đồngtình.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span> II. Content : 1. vocab: Pork - Spinach - papafa - Pineaple 2. Grammar: too/so either/ neither III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Find someone who Warm up 5’ Find someone who Name play sports read books watches TV goes out learns how to kook - Playing sports is one of the most popular free time activities around the world. In this lesson and in the following ones. We will learn about this topic  What are your favorite sports?  When do you always play these sports? - Make a list of the sports which you play in your free time Presentation - Ask ss to look at pictures in A1 Do you recognize these sports? 10’ - Give ss newwords Roller-skating: m«n trît ba tanh football: bóng đá tennis: quÇn vît roller-blading: m«n trît ba tanh These above are 5 among 10 sports which American teenagers like most. Can you guess the rest? - You are going to read the results of a survey carried out recently about the most 10 popular sports among American teenagers. You hear and look at the the book and find out what ten sports are. Compare with the earlier guess - Open the tape in part A1 - Besides 5 sports you know. What are the other sports? - Give correct answers Surprising results: kết quả đáng ngạc nhiên The most popular choice: sù lùa chän phæ biÓn nhÊt One of the most popular games: mét trong nh÷ng m«n thÓ thao đợc a chuộng chọn - Open the tape once more. Ask ss to listen to the whole tape - Call some ss to read the passage loud - Require ss to look at part “Questions”. Require ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer before class - Introduce the content of the lession. Practice - Ask ss to look at part 2 15’ This is the survey containing 11 sports. You ask your your classmates what sports they like most. Write the number of the students who like each sport best. Then add altogether to see which sports is the most popular in the class. The survey question is Which sport do you like best? - Ask ss to compare the results with other groups A2: Ask and answer the question - T. explains how to do - Ss listen - T. asks ss to works in pairs - SS work in pairs to practice asking and answering - T. calls some ss to speak before the class. Activities Teacher – whole class. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class. Work pair. in.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span> Production 10’. - Some ss do ( before the class) - T. and other ss corrects - T. provides some words about fruitss Ex: S1: I like pineapples.Do you like them? S2: Yes, I like pineapples, too. - Grape fruit: - Strawberry: - Water melon: - longan - Mango Individual  Take a class survey : - Have Ss work in groups asking their classmates what sport Pair they like most . - Ask Ss to write the number of students who like each sport groups best , then complete the table in the notebooks . Ask Ss to answer the question : What sport is the most popular in the class ?. Consolidation 2’ - Write the names of the sports which you like best Homework 1’ V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................ …………. 22/3/2010 Unit 13: Period: 80. activities Lesson 2: A. Sports A3,5. I . Objectives: - Qua bài đọc, học sinh học đợc các bớc chuẩn bị 1 bữa ăb , công thức làm 1 số món ăn nhất định. - Sử dụng đợc các trạng từ: first, next … 1 số động từ - Củng cố kỹ năng đọc hiểu, viết 1 thực đơn. II. Content : 1. vocab: - Slice, boil, , add, salad, salt 2. Grammar: too/so either/ neither III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Warm up 5’ Presentation 10’. Contents Chating: Show the picture on. Ask ss to look at the picture and call the name of the sport they are playing. * Activity 1: Drill ss how to use adjectives and adverbs - Ask ss to look at part 3. Say the names of the sports which ss are playing in English In English in order to express how someone do something we use adverbs of manner. Most of these adverbs are formed as follows Adjective + ly = adverbs. Activities Teacher – whole class Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher –.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span> skillful – skillfully slow – slowly bad – badly quick – quickly * Irregular adverbs Adjectives Adverbs good well fast fast hard hard late late early early - The use: the adverbs of manner usually stand after verbs or stan before verbs and complement to verbs ans answer question “How” * Activity 2 Practice A. Pre- reading 17’ - Require ss to look at part 5 What are they doing? They are swimming) What sport is it in the picture? Do you like smming? why? Where can we go swimming? - The teacher introduces: swimming is a popular sport especially for chicken in summer. However, swimming will be dangerous if you don’t strictly follow water safety. Advice in the pool or on the beach. What do we have to do to ensure the safety in the pool - You are going to read a passage about safety awareness in the swimming pool or on the beach. You read and find the main idea of the passage B. While-reading - Ask ss to read the text and fine the main idea of the reading What is the main idea of the reading? - Supply ss words and phrasal words Water safety awareness: kỳ nghỉ hè đang đến gần Aim: mục đích Pool lifeguard: ngêi cøu hé, b¶o vÖ ë c¸c bÓ bëi Pool edge: thµnh, c¹nh bÓ Obey: tu©n theo to aware of: nhËn thøc, ý thøc Red and yellow flags: cờ đỏ và cờ vàng - Repeat ss how to use adverbs of manners - Now you read again and change the adjectives in brackets to adverbs - Give correct answers Adjectice Adverbs clear clearly careful carefully safe safely careless carelessly strict strictly C. Post-reading Production - Ask ss to read the text again and talk about the notices of 10’ swimming pool Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat content of the lession. 2’ - Ask ss to learn by heart adverbs of manner Homework - Ask ss to prepare new lesson 1’ V.Adjustment:. whole clas. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span> ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ 28/3/2010 Unit 13: Period: 81. activities Lesson 3: A. Sports A4,6. I . Objectives: - Gióp häc sinh biÕt d¹ng cÊu t¹o, c¸ch dïng cña tr¹ng tõ chØ thÓ c¸ch - Học sinh biết cách biến đổi câu tơng đơng từ cách dùng tính từ sang trạng từ - Qua bài đọc, học sinh học đợc các bớc chuẩn bị 1 bữa ăb , công thức làm 1 số món II. Content : 1. vocab: - Slice, boil, , add, salad, salt 2. Grammar: too/so either/ neither III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Networks “Most popular sports” Teacher – Warm up whole class 5’ Whole clas Presentation A. Pre- listening - Require ss to look at part 4 10’ What are they doing? Individual (They are walking) Pair Do you always take a walk? What are the benefits of walking? - Base on the tittle “Walking is fun”. Can you guess what the Teacher – reading is about? whole clas - You are going to read a passage about walking. One of the most popular sport activities. You read and answer the questions in your box Practice 17’. Production 10’. - Require ss to read the passage and answer questions a and b - Supply ss newwords walking competition: cuéc thi ®i bé organize: tæ chøc participant: ngêi tham gia regular activity: hoạt động thờng xuyên instead of: thay v× motorbike/bicycle trip: chuyến đi giã ngoại bằng xe đạp/ xe m¸y inexpensive: không rẻ, đắt ability: kh¶ n¨ng - Require ss to read and answer questions - Call some students to read answer loud before class - Give correct answers a. He takes part in Walking For Fun (WFF) club/ walking b. The writer’s school team won the first prize. They were so happy and wanted to keep the activity c. One activity is a 5 km walk/ walking 5 km to the beach on Sunday morning and the other is walk to school day d. It’s 5 km from school to the beach e. Wednesday is the WST (walk to school) day f. Members living near school often take part in the WST day - After that, require ss to translate into Vietnamese - Ask ss to work in groups “What are the benefits of walking ?” 1. fun. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span> 2. easy 3. inexpensive 4. for everyone 5. healthy * Activity 3: - Open the tape in part 6. Ask ss to listen and repeat Consolidation Repeat ss how to use adverbs of manner and the benefits of walking 2’ Homework 1’. - Learn by heart new words and structures by making sentences with them . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 83 in workbook . - Prepare part B1 .. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Unit 13: Period: 82. activities. 30/3/2010. Lesson 4: B. Come and Play (B1.2). I . Objectives: - Sau khi hoàn tất bài học, học sinh có khả năng diễn tả lời mời, biết đáp lại khi nhận hoặc tõ chèi lêi mêi - Biết sử dụng một số động từ tình thái II. Content : 1. vocab: - Ought to - Paddles 2. Grammar: - Modal verbs: can, must, ought to, have to, should - Invitation: Would you like to …? III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Teacher – Warm up - Greetings . whole class 5’ - Have Ss play a game : Find someone Who . Find someone who………… Name.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span> Presentation 10’. Practice 15’. Production 10’. Can play soccer well. Can run quickly . Can play volleyball skillfully . Can’t swim quickly . can’t play table tennis well. - Ask ss to look at the pictures in part 4 * What Ba and Nam doing? (They are playing table tennis) * Can you play table tennis? - Introduce ss how to use modal verbs and give forms Modal verbs + V-inf - Require ss how to invite and refuse invitation Would you like to + V-inf ...? I’d love to, but I can’t - Introduce ss other form It takes sb time to do something - Open the tape. ask ss to listen and repeat - Call some pairs of students to practice before class - Call some students to read answers loud before class - Open the tape once more. Ask ss to answer questions - Call some students to read answer aloud before class - - Gvie correct answers a. Nam must finish his homework before he plays table tennis b. Nam will be ready in a few minutes c. Ba will finish a question for Math d. Ba has two paddles Activity 3: Drill Modal Verbs - Ask ss to look at part 2 You Have learned about Modal Verbs. the way to make and refuse an invitation. Now we continue to practice these verbs - Open the tape and ask ss to practice in pairs - Now you change the underlined details using the information in the box to make up similar diologues - Call some pairs of students to practice the dialogue which you have just made up * Notice: Modal verbs are ordered such as: might-ought tomust - Give some cues and ask Ss to practice : + Nam / before / soccer / do homework . + Lan / when / swimming / swim with adult. + We / after meals / brush teeth . - Make example : S1: What should Nam do before he plays soccer ? S2: He must do his homework . - Have Ss work in pairs . Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span> Consolidation - Repeat the main content of the lession 2’ - Make 3 examples with each structure . Homework - Do exercise 1,2 at page 83,84 in workbook. 1’ V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. Unit 13:. activities Period: 83 Lesson 5: B. Come and Play (B3.4.5). 2/4/2010. I . Objectives: - Sau khi hoàn tất bài học, học sinh có khả năng diễn tả lời mời, biết đáp lại khi nhận hoặc tõ chèi lêi mêi - Biết sử dụng một số động từ tình thái II. Content : 1. vocab - Surface - Scuba diving - Underwater - To invent => invention - Pearl diver - Vessel - To explore - Special breathing equipment - Human - Opportunity 2. Grammar: -Would you like to + V ………….?  I’d love to . / That’s a good idea .  Sorry / That’s too bad . Review the modal verbs . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Chatting: Warm up What do you do on your vacation? 5’ Where do you go? Do you like the ocean? Have you ever gone swimming? Can you dive? Presentation A. Pre-reading - Ask ss to look at pictures in part 3 10’ This is the sport which you heve never learned before. You look at the picture and tell me which sport it is - Introduce ss: This is a scuba-diving Where can we play this sport? - To scuba-diver, what equipment do we need/ have to do? - Introduce ss newwords world’s surface: bề mặt trái đất pearl diver: thî lÆn ngäc trai special breathing equipment: dụng cụ thở đặc biệt. Activities Teacher – whole class. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span> invent (v): ph¸t minh invention: sù ph¸t minh deep-sea diving vessel: tàu lặn sâu dới đáy biển underwater life: cuộc sống dới đáy đại dơng Now you read the text again. Decide whether the statements are True or False. Check and then correct the false statements Practice 15’. Production 10’. B. While-reading - Ask ss to read the text wishperly What do we know about scuba-diving after scanning the text - Then ask ss to check and correct the false statements - Require ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some students to read loud before class - Give correct answers F : Most of the world’s surface is water T T F: Jacques Cousteau invented a deep-sea diving vessel T: - Call some students to read the passage again - Call some students to translate into Vietnamese. Teacher – whole class. * Activity 3: Drill modal verbs Individual - Ask ss to look at part 4 Pair You are going to read a text about the topic the ocean. You read the text and fill in the space with the most suitable modal verbs - Ask ss to read the text and do exercises - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some students to read answers loud - Give correct answers 1. can 5. can 2. must 6. ought to/should 3. mustn’t 7. can/ should 4. should 8. should/ must * Activity 4: Play with words - Open the tape in part 5. Ask ss to listen and repeat in chorus. Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. Homework - Do exercise 5 at page 86 in workbook . 1’ - Prepare unit 14 – A1 V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4/4/2010 Unit 14: Period: 84 I . Objectives:. free time fun Lesson : A. Time For TV (A1).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span> - sau khi học xong, học sinh sẽ có khả năng nói về các hoạt động trong thời gian rảnh rỗi. - Ôn lại cấu trúc mới, đáp lại lời mời - làm quen với cấu trúc diễn đạt những sự lựa chọn, sở thích - LuyÖn tËp ®o¹n héi tho¹i vµ tr¶ lêi c©u hái tr¸c nghiÖm theo néi dung chung cña bµi II. Content : 1. vocab: - Series - Adventure - Cricket - To sound - to prefer - To guess 2. Grammar: Review the invitation and accepting or refusing . Would you like to …………. => I’d love to / I’m sorry , I can’t ……  Like / Frefer + to + V-inf  Like / Frefer + V-ing III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher – Warm up - Chatting with Ss about their freetime by some questions : whole class 5’ What do you usually do in your freetime ? Do you like watching TV? Do you like watching news in English? What programs on TV do you like watching? What is your favorite program? Remark and lead in new lesson . Whole clas Presentation - Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce : This is the picture of Hoa’s family . Look at it and guess what they do in 10’ their freetime ? do they watch TV? Individual - Introduce the situation : Watching TV is one of the most Pair popular activities in freetime . We are going to listen to a dialogue between Lan and Hoa . What do Lan’s / Hoa’s family do in their freetime ? Teacher – - Explain some new words to Ss . whole clas + Series ( n ) : + Adventure ( n ) + Cricket ( n ) + To prefer ( v ) = to like ……better … + To sound ( v ) + To guess ( v ) = to predict - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Have them play a game : what and where . - Ask Ss to guess what Lan and Hoa usually do in the evening . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . Practice 17’. - Ask Ss to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . Hoa usually talks about her day, then she reads and sometimes she plays chess . Lan usually watches TV. - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again then choose the best answers . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the key :. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span> a) Lan invites Hoa to eat dinner with her family . b) Lan wants Hoa to watch TV before dinner . c) Hoa’s family doesn’t have a TV because her aunt and uncle don’t like watching TV. d) Hoa likes spending time with her aunt and uncle at night . e) Lan’s family always watches TV in the evening - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . Production 10’. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about themselves . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark .. Individual Pair. Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . Homework - Do exercise 1 at page 87 in workbook . 1’ - Prepare part A2 . V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6/4/2010 Unit 14: Period: 85. free time fun Lesson2 : A. Time For TV (A2). I . Objectives: - ôn lại cấu trúc lời mời, gợi ý và cách đáp lại - Nắm thêm một số từ về chủ đề phim ảnh - TiÕp tôc luyÖn tËp kü n¨ng nghe, luyÖn tËp ®o¹n héi tho¹i II. Content : 1. vocab: - Detective movie - Pop concert - Classical concert - Cowboy movie - Drama - Advertisement 2. Grammar: Review : would you like to + V ? Review the invitation and accepting or refusing . Would you like to …………. => I’d love to / I’m sorry , I can’t ……  Like / Frefer + to + V-inf  Like / Frefer + V-ing III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Warm up - Greetings . 5’ - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board - Teacher reads in Vietnamese , Ss slap in English.. Activities Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span> - State the group which wins the game . - Remark and lead in new lesson . Presentation 10’. Practice 15’. Production 10’. A. Pre-reading - Explain ss the content of the advertisements Hanoi Youth Culture House: Nhµ v¨n ho¸ thanh niªn Hµ Néi Pop music: ch¬ng tr×nh nh¹c pop Hanoi Opera house: Nhµ h¸t lín Hanéi Classical concert: Hoµ nh¹c cæ ®iÓn Detective movie: phim trinh th¸m Nightly: chiếu hàng đêm New Age Theather: R¹p thÕ hÖ míi Cowboy movie: phim cao båy Youth Theather: Nhµ h¸t tuæi trÎ Play “Easy Life”: KÞch “cuéc sèng dÔ dµng” Worker’s Theater: r¹p c«ng nh©n B. While-reading You are going to listen to a conversation between Lan and Hoa. They are discussing the suitable program to see. You listen and answer. Which program will they see? - First. Open the tape. Ask ss to listen to the tape Do you recognize the structure you have learned? - Review ss structures : Invitations Would you like + to + Vinf....? How about + V-ing .......? What about + V-ing ......? Let’s + V-inf ..... - Open the tape the second time. Ask ss to listen - Explain ss: “Can you make it on Monday night? or Could it be later/ earlier?” - Ask ss to practice in pairs - Call some students to practice before class C. Post-reading Now you work in pairs. Look at the advertisements again and discuss the program you will see by making up a similar conversation - Give a mapped dialogue : Hoa ………………….Lan Would ……theater? ….good . What would you ………..? ….easy life ……. youth theater . Ok …….Tuesday night? Sorry ….E club . How….Thursday? Ok . Fine, let’s ……… - Have Ss work in pairs using mapped dialogue . - Call on some pairs to role play in front of the class . - Correct the mistake.. Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession 2’ - Learn by heart new words . Homework - Make a dialogue in the notebook . 1’ - Prepare part A3 .. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span> V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8/4/2010 Unit 14: Lesson3 :. free time fun Period: 86 A. Time For TV (A3,4). I . Objectives: - ôn lại cấu trúc lời mời, gợi ý và cách đáp lại - Nắm thêm một số từ về chủ đề phim ảnh - TiÕp tôc luyÖn tËp kü n¨ng nghe, luyÖn tËp ®o¹n héi tho¹i II. Content : 1. vocab: - Detective movie - Pop concert - Classical concert - Cowboy movie - Drama - Advertisement 2. Grammar: Review : would you like to + V ? Review the invitation and accepting or refusing . Would you like to …………. => I’d love to / I’m sorry , I can’t ……  Like / Frefer + to + V-inf  Like / Frefer + V-ing III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents “Hangman” with words such as : detective, cowboy , Warm up advertisement 5’ Presentation 10’. . Pre-reading - Ask ss to look at part 3 - Look at the picture and the title “TV in Vietnam”. Can you guess what the reading is about? - We are going to read a passage entitled “TV in Vietnam”, you scan itand see whether your guess is similar to the reading or not. Practice 17’. B. While-reading - Ask ss to answer questions  What is the idea of the passage?  Is it similar to your guess?  Did many people in Vietnam have TV set in their home thirty years ago?  What did they always do after dinner?  What color were the TV programs thirty years ago?  Where do people watch TV today?  Do they spend much time together? - Call some students to read answers aloudly before class - Give cure answers: + No. Only a few people had TV sets thirty years ago. they always gathered both outside and inside their neighbors’ home after dinner to watch TV + They were black and white. Activities Teacher – whole class Whole clas Individual Pair. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span> + Today people watch in their living room + They don’t spend much time together - Explain ss phrasal words Tv owners: gather: Anymore: = No longer - Now look at “Now complete the summary”. The summary is written in another way. You now use the information in the original passage and complete the summary - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call ss to read answers before class - Remark and give correct answers People/ not/ TV/ popular/ evening/ gather/ they/ today/ have/ life/ know Production 10’. C. Post-reading Individual - Let ss play “True/ False repetition drill” Pair a. Most people in Vietnam had a TV set thirty years ago b. TV owners were not popular at that time c. People always gathered in the TV owner’s house * Play with words - Open the tape. Ask ss to listen and repeat in chorus Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession 2’ Learn by heart new words by making 2 sentences with them . Homework 1’ V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 9/4/2010 Unit 14: Period: 87. free time fun Lesson 4 : B. What’s on ? (B1,2). I . Objectives: - Gióp häc sinh biÕt c¸ch th¶o luËn vÒ c¸c ch¬ng tr×nh truyÒn h×nh vµ mçi ch¬ng tr×nh m×nh yªu thÝch - RÌn kÜ n¨ng luyÖn tËp theo cÆp, tr¶ lêi ®o¹n héi tho¹i II. Content : 1. vocab: Sports show / Children’s program /Early news /Weather forecast The world today / A first ful of dollars’ 2. Grammar: What kinds of programs do you like ? III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher – Warm up - Have students play a game : Jumbled words . whole class 5’ RGMAPOR NEATERGE SUMIC VOMEI REHATTE ODARI.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span> Presentation 10’. Practice 17’. - Call on 2 students to go to the board and write down . + Program / Teenager /Music / Movie / Theater / Radio - Remark and give marks . * Activity 1: B1 - Ask ss to look at picture in part B1 What programs is on TV now? (Cartoons) Who are the characters ? Which cartoon is the character from? Do you like to watch cartoons on TV? Which character do you like best? - Introduce ss: we are going to listen a conversation between Ba and Nga. What are they talking about? Do you like cartoons? - Open the tape. Ask ss to listen and answer questions - Explain ss newwords and structures like to do/ doing sth: prefer doing sth: sport shows: cartoons: - Open the tape the second time. Ask ss to listen and practice in pairs - Call some students to practice in pairs before class - Now you look at “Now answer”. Listen to the conversation again and answer questions - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some pairs of students to practice before class a. No, because there aren’t any good programs for teenagers b. Ba watches sport shows, cartoons and movies c. Nga likes to watch programs about teeanager in other countries d.Nga doesn’t like the music programs because they don’t play the kind of music she likes e. In the evening. Nga is going to listen to the radio and may be read a book * Activity 2: Listening A. Pre-listening - Explain ss newwords children programs: early news: weather forecast: the world today: Movie: “A fistful of dollars”: - Ask ss to discuss in groups Do you always watch these programs? Which programs do you like watching? What time do you know each of these programs is on? - You are going to listen to a conversation between Lan and Ba. They are going talking about the time of the TV programs we’ve discussed. You listen and write down the time of the above programs B. While-listening - Open the tape twice or three times. Ask ss to listen and write the time - Ask ss to compare the results with a partner - Call some students to give correct answers a. Children’s program starts at five b. The Early News is at six c. The weather forecast is at ten past six. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span> d. The World today is at a quarter past six e. The movie: “A fistful of dollars” starts at seven - Give some cues then ask students to practice asking and Production answering : 10’ + Morning News + Teenagers. + The world of animals . + Music programs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . Consolidation 2’ - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession - Learn by heart new words . Homework - Do exercise 1,2 at page 90 in workbook . 1’ V.Adjustment:. Individual Pair. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10/4/2010 Unit 14: Period: 88. free time fun Lesson 5 : B. What’s on ? (B3,4). I . Objectives: - Giúp học sinh có khả năng nói về một vài chơng trình truyền hình phổ biến đợc nhiều ngời yªu thÝch - Nâng cao kỹ năng đọc hiểu một đoạn văn II. Content : 1. vocab: - Audience - To contest - Artist - Contestant - To perform - Folk music - Imports - To include - Satellite - Cable TV 2. Grammar: Review : the simple present tense . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher – Warm up - Have students play a game : whole class 5’ Noughts and Crosses Early News The world Weather today forecast Cartoons. Sports shows. Teenagers. Music. Movies. News in English EX: What kind of programs do you like? I like to watch Early News . - Have students play in 2 groups . - State the group which wins the game. Presentation 10’. * Activity 1: Reading comprehention A. Pre-reading  Do you recognize the characters in each picture?  In which programs do these scenes usually appear?  What words will we encouter in the reading about pop music?. Whole clas Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span> - Give students newwords Audience: Perform: Shows: Contest: Contests of knowledge/ folk music/ sports: Contestant: Series: - You are going to listen to a tape about 3 popular TV programs. You listen to the tape, look at the book and tel me again. “What are the programs?” Practice 17’. Production 10’. B. While-reading - Open the tape two or three times. Ask ss to listen and answer questions - Call some students to read before class - Call some pairs of students to answer before class - Remark and give correct answers a. Teenagers like to hear the lastest pop music and see the shows of their favorite artists b. In contest programs the contestants are students, workers or family members c. Imports usually include police and hospital series d. Student’s answer C. Post-reading Do you like watching? What is your most favorite program? * Activity 2: Write After reading the passage, now you look at the words in the box. You read the reading again and complete it - Call some students to read keys - Remark and give correct answers 1. around 6. like 2. watch 7. station 3. listen 8. receive 4. series 9. cities 5. show 10. possible - Call some students to read. Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair. Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lesson. 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . Homework - Do exercise 3,4 at page 91 in workbook . 1’ - Review for doing a test in the next lesson . V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 12/4/2010 Period 89 I . Objectives:. Test 45 minites.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span> - Gióp häc sinh cã kh¶ n¨ng cñng cè thªm kiÕn thøc ng«n ng÷ , vèn tõ vùng µ thùc hµnh lµm bµi tËp còng nh nhËn ra nh÷ng kiÕn thøc m×nh cha n¾m b¾t mét c¸ch ch¾c ch¾n. Kiểm tra kiến thức của học sinh qua 3 bài 13, 14. Qua đó biết đợc những phần kiến thức học sinh còn yếu để có biện pháp củng cố II. Content : 1Grammar: Modal verbs: must, ought to, have to Gerund: like, prefer, enjoy, love + V ing Adjectives and adverbs Invitation with : would you like……and what would you like? 2 Vocabulary: B: ma trËn Chủ đề. NhËn biÕt TNKQ TL. I. Reading II. Language focus. Phonetic. 4. Vocabulary. 3. Grammar. 5. Th«ng hiÓu TNKQ TL 2 4 1 2. 5. 8 0,75. 2,5. 20. 2,0. 5,0 1,25 4. 20. Tæng. 1,0. III. Writing Tæng. VËn dông TL. 5,0 I/ Which is differently pronounced? (1m) (T×m tõ cã c¸ch ph¸t ©m kh¸c víi tõ cßn l¹i) 1. a. walked b. stopped c. lived 2. a. know b. how c. show 3. a. needed b. played c. returned 4. a. wanted b. needed c. traveled. 6. 3. 4. 2 2. d. washed d. slow d. moved d. rented. II. Choose the correct answers.(chọn đáp án đúng)(2ms) 1. I can’t go out for a walk now. I ………..my home work. A. Must do B. Must to do C. Must doing 2. My father is a …………football player. A. skill B. skillful C. skillfully 3. Would you like to go to the movies tonight? A. Yes, I do B. Yes, I like C. I’d love to 4. ………………do you like? A. What of programs B. What kinds of programs C. What of kinds programs 5. In 1960s, ……….. in Vietnam didn’t have a TV set. A. Most of people B. Most people C. Most of the people 6. I ought to finish my homework before I………..table tennis. A. Will play B. Play C. am playing 7. Playing chess after dinner sounds …………..to me. A. boring B. bored C. boringly 8. We’ll take a walk instead ………riding a bicycle. A. of B. for C. with III. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.(2ms) (Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc) 1. I’d like (tell) ……………you something about myself. 2. They (live) …………. In Hue ten years ago. 3. She (not like) ……………..riding. 4. Nam prefers (take)……………part in sports to (watch)………………them. 5. Lan usually (watch)…………….TV in the evening. IV. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions. (3ms) (§äc ®o¹n héi tho¹i gi÷a Ba vµ Nam råi tr¶ lêi c©u hái). 5 30. 2,5 10.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span> Ba : Would you like to see a movie, Nam? Nam : Yes , I’d love to . What would you like to see? Ba : There is an interesting movie on at the New Age theater. Nam : What movie is it ? Ba : It’s a detective movie . Nam : OK . Let’s go this evening then. Ba : I’m sorry I can’t. I have to finish my homework tonight. What about tomorrow evening? Nam : Sorry . I’m going to visit my grandmother. How about Friday evening? Ba : That’s OK. Let’s meet at half past seven in front of the theater. A: True or False: 1. Nam doesn’t want to see a movie. ( ……. ) 2. Ba and Nam are going to meet at 7.30. ( ……. ) 1. What would Ba like to see? ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 2. Will Ba and Nam go to the theater tonight? …………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. What is Nam going to do tomorrow evening? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 4. Where will they meet? ………………………………………………………………………………………… V. Rewrite these sentences, beginning with the words given. (2ms) (Viết lại câu sau bắt đầu bằng từ đã cho sao cho nghĩa câu không thay đổi) 1. Nam is a good table tennis player. => Nam plays ……………………………………………………………………….. 2. Why don’t we go to the amusement center? => What about ………………………………………………………………………? 3. He swims quickly. => He is …………………………………………………………………………….. 4. You advise you not to watch TV too late. => You should ………………………………………………………………………. V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 12/4/2010. Period 90. Test correction I . Objectives: Gióp häc sinh cã kh¶ n¨ng cñng cè thªm kiÕn thøc ng«n ng÷ , vèn tõ vùng µ thùc hµnh lµm bµi tËp còng nh nhËn ra nh÷ng kiÕn thøc m×nh cha n¾m b¾t mét c¸ch ch¾c ch¾n.. - Kiểm tra kiến thức của học sinh qua 3 bài 13, 14. Qua đó biết đợc những phần kiến thức. học sinh còn yếu để có biện pháp củng cố - Modal verbs: must, ought to, have to - Gerund: like, prefer, enjoy, love + V ing - Adjectives and adverbs - Invitation with : would you like……and what would you like? II/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. III/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Sing a song Warm up 5’ Presentation 1) Modal verbs: must, ought to, have to Ask ss to call out all modal verbs they have learnt. 15’ Ask ss to make sentence with each one: Must: He must finish his homework before playing volleyball. He must not finish his homework before playing volleyball.. Activities Teacher – whole class Whole clas Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span> Must he finish his homework before playing volleyball. Ought to: they ought go to the surgery every month. Have to: My father has to stay up late to take of sick person. Can, could, may, might…. Form: S + modal verb + V(inf) + O. S + modal verb + not + V(inf) + O. Modal verb + S + not + V(inf) + O?. Teacher – whole clas. 2) Gerund: like, prefer, enjoy, love + V ing Ask ss to call out all the words they have learnt. Ask ss to make sentence with each one: I prefer playing volleyball to playing soccer. 3) Adjectives and adverbs Adjectives: 4) Invitation: would you like……and what would you like? Practice 17’. Production 7’. I/ Which is differently pronounced? 1) c. lived 2) b. how 3) a. needed Teacher – 4) c. traveled whole class II. Choose the correct answers.(chọn đáp án đúng) 1)A. Must do 2)B. skillful 3)C. I’d love to 4)B. What kinds of programs 5)A. Most of people 6)B. Play 7)A. boring 8)A. of III. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. to tell 2. lived 3. did not like 4. taking watching 5. watches IV. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions. (§äc ®o¹n héi tho¹i gi÷a Ba vµ Nam råi tr¶ lêi c©u hái) A. 1. F 2. T B. Answer: 1) He would like to see a movie 2) No, they won’t. 3) He is going to visit his grandmother 4) they will meet in front of the theater V. Rewrite these sentences, beginning with the words given. (Viết lại câu sau bắt đầu bằng từ đã cho sao cho nghĩa câu không thay đổi) 1) Nam plays table tennis skillfully. 2) What about going to the amusement center? 3) He is a quick swimmer. 4) You should not watch TV too much.s - Read marks. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span> - Prepare new lesson. Homework 1’ V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 14/4/2010 UNIT 15 :. Period 91:. GOING OUT. Lesson 1 : A – Video games ( A1 ). I . Objectives: - Học sinh đợc làm quen với chủ đề mới, trò chơi điện tử, biết đợc các tác động của chóng. - học sinh có khả năng đa ra lời khuyên và đáp lại lời khuyên về vấn đề các trò chơi điện từ - Rèn kỹ năng luyện tập theo cặp theo chủ đề trong bài II. Content : 1. Vocabulary : - Video games - Arcade - Amusement center - Addictive 2. Grammar : Structure : Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade . No, I won’t . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Greetings . Teacher – Warm up - Have Ss play a game : Networks . whole class 5’ Entertainments. Presentation 10’. Practice 17’. - Have Ss play game in 2 groups . - Remark and lead in new lesson . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : What can you see in the picture ? - Introduce some new words : + Amusement center ( n ) : A place where we can go to play some games for relaxing . + Video games ( n ) : + Arcade ( n ) : + Addictive ( adj ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students play a game : what and where - Have students look at the dialogue and listen to the tape . - Ask students to read after the tape . - Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to practice reading in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Introduce the new model sentence : + Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade.. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span> => No, I won’t . ( Advise somebody not to do something .) - Ask students to make examples as model . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions in the book . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Have some students go to the board and write the correct answers . - Ask students to write the answers in the notebooks . a. He’s going to the amusement center . b. He’s going to play video games . c. He goes to the amusement center about once a week . d. No, he doesn’t . e. He usually stays for about an hour . f. Because video games can be addictive . g. He will do his homework later . Give a mapped dialogue and ask students to look at Individual Production carefully . Pair 10’ YOU YOUR FRIEND Where ….going ? Amusement center What …….do? video games How often ? 2/ week Don’t spend …. video games … Don’t forget …… homework . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession 2’ - Learn by heart new words and structure by making 2 Homework sentences with each . 1’ - Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook . - Prepare part A2,3 . V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 16/4/2010 UNIT 15 :. Period 92:. GOING OUT. Lesson 2 : A – Video games ( A2,3 ). I . Objectives: - Giúp học sinh tiếp tục nắm vững chủ đề video games qua bài đọc hiểu, biết đ ợc thời gian ch¬i còng nh ¶nh hëng xÊu c¶u trß ch¬i ®iÖn tö vµ c¸ch kh¾c phôc - Nâng cao kỹ năng đọc hiểu dạng trắc nghiệm và điền từ vào đoạn II. Content : 1. Vocabulary : - Inventor - Social skill - Dizzy - Premises.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span> - To develop - Robbery - To identify - Industry 2. Grammar : - Modal verbs . - The present simple tense III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities Greetings . Teacher – Warm up - Ask students some questions such as : whole class 5’ + Do you like playing video games ? + How often do you play video games ? + How long do you usually spend playing video games? + What do you think about playing video games ? ……………… - Remark and lead in new lesson Whole clas Presentation introduce some new words : + Inventor ( n ) The person who invents videogames . 10’ + Dizzy ( adj ) : Individual + To develop ( v ) : Pair + Social skill ( n ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually Teacher – - - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask students whole clas to do an exercise : True or False prediction . 1. Children like playing video games because they are good fun . 2. It’ s very good for children to spend too much time on their own . 3. Playing video games for a long time will make the children become tired . 4. Children mustn’t play outdoors with their friends . 5. Some inventors become rich when they are very young . - Have students work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their prediction. - Ask students to look at the books and listen to the tape then Practice check their prediction . 17’ - Call on some students to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T Teacher – - Have students listen to the tape again and whole class - Ask students to read the text in silent . - call on 3or 4 students to read the text aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . * Now answer , complete the sentences . - Have students read the text again to find out the answers . - Have students exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers . a) Many young people play video games . b) Some inventors of video games become very rich . c) The doctor thinks all children should take part in outdoor activities with their friends . d) The doctor says you should spend little time playing video games . - Have students write in the notebooks . Complete the passage with the words in the box . - Explain the request of the exercise then introduce some new.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span> words . + To identify ( v ) : + Premises ( n ) : + Robbery ( n ) => robber ( n ) + Industry ( n ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students complete the passage . - Ask them to exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class - Correct and give the key : 1. be 2. have 3. is 4. identify 5. are 6. use 7. can 8. will 9. buy 10. show - Call on 2 students to read the completed passage aloud - Ask students to write down . - Have students work in groups discussing about the Production disadvantages of playing video games . 10’ - Call on some groups to demonstrate their ideas in front of the class . Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . Homework - Do exercise 3,4 in workbook . 1’ - Prepare the next lesson . V.Adjustment:. Individual Pair. ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................. 18/4/2010 UNIT 15 :. Period 93:. GOING OUT. Lesson 3 : B – In the city ( B1,2 ). I . Objectives: - ¤n l¹i c¸ch nãi nh÷ng ®iÒu thÝch vµ kh«ng thÝch - làm quen với cấu trúc: used to/be/ get used to để nói về các hành động trong quá khứ II. Content : 1. Vocabulary : - The rest - To scare - To hate - Awake - Get used to - Direction 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense and past tense . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Ask students to find the words which relate to the city and Teacher – Warm up country . whole class 5’ - Have students work in groups . -Remark and lead in new lesson . Presentation - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question : Whole clas What is the picture about ? 10’ - Ask students some questions such as : Individual + Do you like to live in the city or in the country ? Pair Why / why not ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Introduce some new words to students : Teacher – + The rest ( n ) : whole clas.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span> + Awake ( adj ) : + To scare ( v ) : + To hate ( v ) = to dislike + To get used to + N . + Direction ( n ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students play a game : rub out and remember . - Have students discuss about life in the city and life in the country . * Brainstorming : Life in the city Life in the country Crowded Little traffic ………… ………….. - Have students work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their ideas . Practice 15’. - Ask students to look at the book and listen to the tape , then answer the question : Lan and Hoa , who likes to live in the city or in the country . - Play the tape for students . - Have students give the answers . Teacher – - Have students read the dialogue in pairs . whole class - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions . - Have students play a game : Lucky numbers 1. Where did Hoa live before ? 2. Why doesn’t Hoa like the city ? 3. LN . 4. What does Hoa do in the evening ? 5. What does Hoa dislike most in the city ? Why ? 6. Does She like the city ? 7. LN 8 . Why did Hoa like living in a village in Hue? - Remark and ask students to write the answers in the notebooks .. Production 10’. - Ask students to use the questions in part B2 to work in pairs Individual discussing about life in the city and life in the country . Pair - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct and remark.. Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each Homework - Write the answers in part B2 in the exercise books . 1’ - Prepare part B3,4 . V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span> 20/4/2010 UNIT 15 :. Period 94:. GOING OUT. Lesson 4 : B – In the city ( B3). I . Objectives: - Nâng cao kỹ năng đọc hiểu - Qua bài đọc, học sinh tiếp tục làm quen chủ đề thành thị, thiểu hơn cuộc sống ở thành phố, biết đợc những hoạ động vui chơi, học tập và các công việc của học sinh thành phố thờng lµm II. Content : 1. Vocabulary : - The rest - To scare - To hate - Awake - Get used to - Direction 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense and past tense . III/ Teaching aids. - Make a plan. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents Activities - Hoa’s village in Hue was very quiet Teacher – Warm up + The city has only a little traffic whole class 5’ + Lan hates going to the movies most + there are busy roads and traffic in the city? + Lan says that Hoa will get used to it soon Question (In the last lesson, Lan said that Hoa would get used to te life in the city soon. In your opinion, was she right?) What would Hoa do in the city? Presentation 10’. Practice 17’. (Lan is firght. Hoa could cross the road began to go out more often) New words - Help each other: - Far too expensive: - Eat out: - Socialize: - Public library: - After all (adv):. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. - T. asks ss to scan the text and answer the T’s questions above - Ss read answer - T. provides some new words and phrase - She visits friends Teacher – - She listen to music and talks whole class - She and her friends help each other with their home works - She (always) plays table tennis and phay chess with her frineds.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span> - She socializes with her friends - She goes to the library and brrows books Production 10’. - T. asks ss to read the text again and do the exercise in the Individual book P152 Pair - Ss do (make a list of the things) Hoa usually did in the evening, using simple pre sent tense) - T. calls some ss to read the answer - Ss read Quesstions 1. What did Hoa and her friends usually do (when she went out)? - They talked and listened to … 2. Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat out in the evening? - Because everythings was far too expensive 3. What did she prefer to do? - … to socialize with her friends 4. Why could n’t Hoa read books in the village? Because there wasn’t a library in their village 5. How many books did the public library in the city have? - Thounsand of books 6. Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all - Because she got used to it. Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession 2’ - Retell the text and translat it into Vietnamese Homework 1’ V.Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................ 24/4/2010 UNIT 15 :. GOING OUT. Period 95. Lesson 4 : B – In the city ( B4,5). I . Objectives: - Nâng cao kỹ năng đọc hiểu - Qua bài đọc, học sinh tiếp tục làm quen chủ đề thành thị, thiểu hơn cuộc sống ở thành phố, biết đợc những hoạ động vui chơi, học tập và các công việc của học sinh thành phố thờng lµm II. Content : 1. Vocabulary : - Rarely - To socialize 2. Grammar : - Review : The simple present tense and past simple tense . - Like / Prefer + to infinitive ; Like + gerund III/ Teaching aids..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span> - Make a plan.. IV/ Teaching procedures. Stages Contents - Greetings . Warm up - Have students play a game : Networks 5’ City. Activities Teacher – whole class country. - Have students work in groups . - Have students go to the board and write . - Remark . Presentation 10’. Practice 15’. - Introduce the content of the text : The text tells how Hoa got used to the city life . - Ask students to read the text and find out what she could do - Have students read the text in silent . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Call on some students to read the text aloud . - Correct the pronunciation . - Introduce new words : + Rarely ( adv ) : + To socialize ( v ) : + Structure : Like / prefer + to infinitive Ex: Hoa likes to read / She prefers to socialize with her friends . Like / prefer + gerund . Ex: Hoa like playing chess very much . - Ask students to make sentences as model - Give some more questions and ask students to answer : a) What did Hoa and her friends often do together ? b) Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat out in the evening ? c) Why couldn’t Hoa read many books in her village ? d) Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all ? - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes . - Ask students to read the text again then make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening , using the simple present tense . - Have students exchange the results with their partners . - Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class . - Call one student to go to the board and write down . - Correct and ask students to write in the notebooks . Listen . Match each name to an activity . - Introduce the aim of the listening . - Ask students to look at the pictures and give the activity of each picture . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Have students guess and write the names next to the pictures . - Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Play the tape for students . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span> class . - Play the tape again for students to check the answers - Correct and give the key : Ba- b Hoa- a Nga – d Nam – c Lan – f An – e - Ask students to use the model in part B3 and the pictures in Production B4 to talk about what they like to do or dis like to do . 10’ - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . Consolidation - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession 2’ - Retell the text and translat it into Vietnamese Homework 1’ V.Adjustment:. Individual Pair. .................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................... 26/4/2010. Unit:16. Period 96. PEOPLE & PLACES Lesson: 1 A1.2. I . Objectives : - sau tiết học, Hs có thể đọc tên một số quốc gia trong khu vực Châu á và thủ đô của các nớc đó. II . Language content: Reading the dialogue to know some famous places in Asia III . Teaching aid: - Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture. IV. Procedure: Stages Contents Activities Teacher Warm up - Kim’s game –class 5’ - Look at the pictures and name some famous places in Asia . Whole Presentation - T asks Ss to look at a post card (P.154) clas 10’ - Ss look - T makes questions: Individual Greeting from Bangkok ! lêi chµo tõ B¨ng Cèc. Pair - Where is Bangkok ? - What do you know about Thailand ? - Beside Thailand, which countries and their capitals in South Teacher East Asea do you know ? – whole 1. Pre Teach: clas postcard (n) bưu thiếp pilot (n) phi công region (n) vùng miền album (n) quyển an-bom occasionally = sometimes “Rub out and remember”: 2. Open Prediction: Match the half sentences (P.155) A B a) ba’s uncle is see the stamp b) Uncle Nghia sends the as well as the stamps postcards c) ba keeps the postcards in a special book d) ba puts the stamps a pilot.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span> e) Hoa wants to many different places f) Ba and Hoa wuold like to visit to Ba fom the cities he visits Practice - T plays the tape A.1. (twice) 15’ - Ss listen to the tape and tell which places Mr Nghia flew to ? -- Which countries are the following capitals belong to ? (Hong Kong, Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, Jakarta, Phnom Penh, Vientiane, Yangon) - T plays the tape again and asks Ss to match the half-sentences to make completed ones. - Ss listen and do exercise then give answers in front of the class. - T gives the right answers. - T lets Ss practice the dialogue in pairs - T plays the tape again and asks Ss to match the half-sentences to make completed ones. The right answers: a) - D b) - F c) B d) - C e) - A f) - E Ss listen and do exercise then give answers in front of the class. - T gives the right answers. - T lets Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. Production 2. Complete the table 10’ - T asks Ss to look at A. 2 (P.155) - Ss look at the box about the names of some Asean countries and tell which countries they are ? Cambodia: Cam pu cia Myanmar: Mi - an - ma Indonesia: In - đô - nê- xi -a Malaysia: Ma-lai-xi-a Thailand: Thai lan Lao: Lµo Capital Country Bangkok Thailand Beijing China Kuala Lumpur Malaysia Phnom Penh Cambodia Vientiane Laos Yangon Myanmar Jakarta Indonesia - T asks Ss to look at the table and match the capital manes with the countries. - Ss do. S1: Where does Ba's uncle fly to ? S2: He usually/sometimes flies to .... S1: Where is that ? S2: It's in .... T asks Ss to practice ansking and answering. Consolidatio - Ask ss to repeat the main content of the lession n 2’ Homework - T asks Ss to write 15 names of countries and their capitals, that they know. 1’ V.Adjustment:. Teacher – whole class. Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span> ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... .. 28/4/2010. Unit:16 Period 97. PEOPLE & PLACES Lesson: 2 A3,4. I . Objectives : - sau tiết học, Hs có thể đọc tên một số địa điểm du lịch nổi tiếng và miêu tả về cá địa danh đó. II .: Language content: Reading a text to know many attractions in South East Asia. III . Teaching aids :- Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture. IV. Teaching aid Reading the dialogue to know some famous places in Asia III . Teaching aid: - Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture. IV. Procedure: Stages Contents Activities Teacher – Warm up Slap the board 5’ - history, visit, different, show, prefer, ocean, culture, dive, whole class healthy, outdoor, life. Activity one 15’. * Pre-listening: - T asks Ss to look at the picture (P.156) - Ss look at and answer - Where is this man ? - (at the airport) - What is his job ? Why do you know ? (A pilot) - What does a pilot do ? - T conducts Ss to look at one pilot's schedule from Monday to Sunday, and listen to the tape then complete the scheldule. * While - listeing: - T plays the tape A.3 (3 times) - Ss listen to the tape and do exercise, then give answers. - T plays the tape again (once) and gives the right answers. - Ss check and correct Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday. Bangkok and Singapore Singapore Jakarta Bali Bali Hong Kong back to Ha Noi. Stay overnight: ở qua đêm Cultural show: buæi biÓu diÔn v¨n ho¸ Balines dancers: các nghệ sỹ khiêu vũ đảo Ba li. * Post - listening: EX; On Moday he flew to Bangkok and then to Singapore ..... Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span> Activity two: * Pre-reading: 27’ - What kinds of tourism do you like most? - If you are interested in history / ocean / culture ... where can we go ? Attractions: nh÷ng ®iÓm thu hót kh¸ch du lÞch Ancient monuments: nh÷ng l¨ng mé cæ Khmer / Buddhist temples: đền thờ của ngời Khơ me Puppet shows: buæi biÓu diÔn móa rèi Resort: khu nghØ m¸t Colorful corals: những đảo san hô đầy màu sắc. T conducts Ss to prapare to read a passage about tourism attractions in South-East Asia, and tell what are the destinations and their special features. * While-reading: - T plays the tape A.4 (twice) - Ss listen to the tape - T asks Ss to answer the questions a, b (P.157)Questions. a) The passage mentions .... The right answers: The three kinds of tourist attrctions mentioned in the passage are ancient monuments, shows and resort. - Where can you see colorful dances ? - What can you see in Indonesia ? - What can you do when you go to the sea ? * Post-reading: EX: Ancient Shows Resorts monuments Ch¨m Traditional Beaches in temples, ... music Da Nang, ... shows in Bac Ninh ... T asks Ss to do exercises 1, 2 -P.99 - 100. (workbook) Homework do exercise 4 -P. 101. (workbook) 1’ V.Adjustment:. Teacher – whole class. Individual. Pair. .................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span> Period 98 Unit:16. 2/5/2009. PEOPLE & PLACES Lesson: 3 B 1,2,3. I . OBJECTIVES : - sau tiÕt häc, Hs cã thÓ biÕt nhiÒu h¬n vÒ nh÷ng ngêi næi tiÕng ë việt nam và trên thế giới. Nh: đại tớng Võ Nguyên Giáp , cầu thủ bóng đá Pê lê. II . LANGUAGE CONTENTS : Reading a text to know many attractions in South East Asia. III . TEACHING AIDS :- Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture. IV. PROCEDURES : Stages Warm up 5’. Contents Show the picture of Vo nguyen Giap, ask ss to answer - Who is in the picture ? - Do you know any thing about this person ? - Which victory is the picture about ? - Do you know the famous person who was in this battle ?. Activities Teacher – whole class. Activity one 10’. - Ss prepare to read a conversation between Ba and Liz abour General Vo Nguyen Giap. - T plays the tape B.1 (twice) - Ss listen - T presents new words General: đại tớng Be famous for...: næi tiÕng vÒ .... Lead: lãnh đạo People' s Army of Viet Nam: Q§ND ViÖt Nam Commander-in-chief: tæng chØ huy Force: lùc lîng Defeat: đánh bại Be good at... giái vÒ .. Be interested in ...thích/ quan tâm đến... - T lets Ss read the text and do (true / False) - Ss do, then give answers in front of the class. Answer key: a) False. Liz knows nothing about General Giap. b) False. The People' s Army of VN defeated the French in. Whole clas Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span> 1954. c) True d) False. General Giap was born in 1911 e) True f) False. Ba will lend Liz some history books. Activity two: - T hangs a picture of famous football players Romario, 15’ Pele... Then makes Qs. - Do you like these players ? Why ? - Do you know anything about them ? - T asks Ss to read and complete a conversation between Hoa and Lan about Romario and Pele, use the words in the box. - Ss do then give answers. * Answer key: (1) like (2) prefer (3) guess (4) favorite 2- b) Activity * Pre-reading. three: 10’ Tourist destination: ®iÓm thu hót du lÞch Battle veterans: cùu chiÕn binh Battle site: trận địa Neighboring villages: nh÷ng ng«i lµng kÒ bªn Valley: thung lòng Hospitality: lßng hiÕu kh¸ch Trading center: trung t©m th¬ng m¹i * While-reading: Answwer key: a) People can visit the battle site in DBP. b) Tourists can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the Muong Thanh valley, ... c) DBP is only 30 kms from the Lao' s border, so it is an important trading center.. Teacher – whole class. Individual. Pair. T asks Ss to write about one famous person, who they like. Homework 5’ V.Ajustment: ..................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... Period 99. Unit:16. 4/5/2009. PEOPLE & PLACES Lesson: 4 B 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span> I . OBJECTIVES : - sau tiÕt häc, Hs cã thÓ biÕt nhiÒu h¬n vÒ nh÷ng nhµ khoa häc næi tiếng thế giới nh: Thomas Edison and Hans Christian Andersen thực hành hỏi đáp thông tin. II . LANGUAGE CONTENTS : III . TEACHING AIDS :- Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture. IV. PROCEDURES : Stages Warm up 5’ Pre speaking 10’. While speaking: 15’. Post speaking: 10’. Contents. Activities Teacher – whole class. T introduces: We are going to read a passage about two famous people: Thomas Edison and Hans Christian Andersen. What do you know about these two people ? Now you work in groups to make a list of the facts about them. - T presents words Invent / invention / inventtor: ph¸t minh... Electric light bulb: bóng đèn điện Power station: nhµ m¸y ph¸t ®iÖn Gramophone: máy quy đĩa Motion picture: phim ®iÖn ¶nh Fairy tales: truyÖn cæ tÝch. Whole clas. Play game: Net work. Individual Pair Teacher – whole clas. - Ss read about Thomas Edison and Hans Christian Andersen then answer the questions: - When was Thomas Edison born ? - When did he die ? Teacher – - What did Thomas Edison invent ? whole class - When was Andersen born ? - When did he die ? - What did he write ? - T conducts Ss to "Now work with a partner" in pairs. Onis student A the other is Student B. look at your information Student A: you are a newspaper repoter. Imagine you are going to interview Thomas Edison. Ask many question as possible. Student B: Yopu are thomas Edison. A newspaper repoter is going to interview you. Use the information in the reading passage to answer the questions. Now change roles. Student A is Hans christan Andersen student B is the reporter. Complete the interview. Give the information about Genaral Vonguyen Giap Ask ss to do the same ask and answer the questions. Pair. T asks Ss to write about one famous person, who they like. Homework 5’ V.Ajustment: ..................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span> Period 100. 6/5/2009. Unit:16. PEOPLE & PLACES Lesson: 5 B 5. I . OBJECTIVES : - Sau tiÕt häc, Hs cã thÓ biÕt nhiÒu h¬n vÒ nh÷ng mèc lÞch sö vµ sù kiện chính trong cuộc đời và sự nghiệp Bác Hồ. II . LANGUAGE CONTENTS : III . TEACHING AIDS :- Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture. IV. PROCEDURES : Stages Warm up 5’. Pre-listening 10’. Contents Show the picture: Can you call the names of the songs about him? When was he born? Where is his village? What do you know about it? Show the poster on ask ss to fill the information. Complete the biography of Uncle Ho Events Year Place Date of birth 1890 Kim Lien. Activities Teacher – whole class. Whole clas Individual Pair.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span> Left VN Work in hotel 1900s London Went to other 1917 country Moved again 1923 Founded Vietnamese Communist Party Formed Viet Minh 1941 Viet Nam Front Became President Viet Nam Died Ha Noi While – - T explains the exercise and then plays the tape. listening - Ss listen to the tape then complete the table. 15’ Complete the biography of Uncle Ho Events Year Place Date of birth 1890 Kim Lien Left VN 1911 Saigon Work in hotel 1900s London Went to other 1917 Paris country Moved again 1923 Moscow Founded Vietnamese 1930 Guangzhou Communist Party Formed Viet Minh 1941 Viet Nam Front Became President 1945 Viet Nam Died 1969 Ha Noi Post- Base on the information you know about Hochi Minh and listeninging: the information in the lesson use the past simple tense to 10’ write a short biography about Uncle Ho.. Teacher – whole clas. Teacher – whole class. Pair. T asks Ss to write about one famous person, who they like. Homework 5’ V.Ajustment: ..................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span> Period 103-104. Language focus A- Objectives:. - Ss review words and phrases of some above lesson B- Preparations: - Books, school things,... C- Procedures: I- Checking up:. - Ss do homework in front of the class. II- New lesson:. T and Ss ' activities. Content s. - T explains the forms and uses of past 1) To be: simple tense. (+) S + was/were + O - Ss review, copy, make examples Ex: It was wonderful. (-) S + was not (wasn't)/were not (weren't) + O. Ex: Things weren't cheap. (?) Was/Were + S + O ? Yes, S + was/were. (No, S + wasn't/weren't) 2) Ordinary verbs: (+) S + V-ed + O Ex: Liz visited ..... (-) S + did not (didn't) - V-infi + O Ex: I didn't go camping... (?) Did + S + V-infi + O ? - T conducts Ss to read irregular verbs. 3) Irregular verbs: - Ss read and learn by heart irregular Ex: take - took verbs. buy - bought have - had (The past simple tense expresses an action that completely finished in the past. This tense always goes with: yesterday, last night/week/month/year, ogo ...). T and Ss ' activities. Content s friends yesterday. Ex: I visited my ..... Note: Pronunciation of "ed" + / t / : walked; laughed .... + / d / : opened; learned ... + / id /: a verb ends with /t/ or /d/. (started; needed ...).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span> - T gives exercises. - Ss do the exercises.. - T gives exercises. - Ss do the exercises.. T and Ss ' activities. Exercise 1: Complete the following sentences: 1. Yesterday I got up early to go ... 2. Last night I got up at ... 3. Last su,,er we went ... 4. A month ago I met a friend walking in ... 5. Last Sunday, I read ... 6. I went to the cinema only since last ... 7. Yesterday it rained ... 8. I received a good mark for my work yesterday from my ... Exercise 2: Answer the following questions: 1. Where did you go yesterday ? 2. What did you write last night ? 3. Where did you spend your last Summer vacation ? 4. Who taught you yesterday morning ? 5. Where did you live 3 years ago ? 6. Where did you sleep last night ? Exercise 3. Choose correct word or. phrase given in the lankets to complete the sentences. 1. Did you (get up / got up) late this morning ? 2. We (buyed / bought) some souvenirs from our holiday in Vietnam. 3. (Was / Were) your last birthday over six weeks ago ? 4. Hoang (didn't arrive / not arrived) in the evening. Content Exercise 4. Choose scorrect word or phrase. given in the lankets to complete the sentences. 1. Did you (get up / got up) late this morning ? 2. We (buyed / bought) some souvenirs from our holiday in Vietnam. 3. (Was / Were) your last birthday over six weeks ago ? 4. Hoang (didn't arrive / not arrived) in the evening. 5. (Was / Did) the Robinsons return to Ha Noi by train ? 6. Hoa learned how (using / to use) a sewing machine with her neighbor, Mrs.Mai. 7. Was Nam at the theater last night ? - Yes, (she was / she did). 8. The Browns went to HCM City (by plane / on plane). 9. I don't know where (was he / he was) last night. Exercise 5. Write a letter to a friend to tell. what you did on the last vacation. ...........................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span> .......................................................................... III- Consolidation:. - Ss repeat and remember: + The forms and uses of past simple tense. + Prepositions..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span>

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×